Dell C1765Nf Mfp Laser Printer Users Manual User's Guide

2014-11-13

: Dell Dell-C1765Nf-Mfp-Laser-Printer-Users-Manual-113588 dell-c1765nf-mfp-laser-printer-users-manual-113588 dell pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 376 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw
Color Multifunction Printer
User's Guide
Regulatory Model: Dell C1765nf / Dell C1765nfw
Contents 1
Contents
Before Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
A Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1 Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer User's
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2 Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3 Product Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4 About the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Rear View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Securing the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Ordering Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5 Removing Packaging Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6 Connecting Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting Printer to Computer or Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2Contents
Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Wireless Connection (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only) . . . . 37
Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Connecting the Telephone Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Turning On the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7 Setting Up Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Printer Setup Using the Software and Documentation Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
8 Setting the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Assigning an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
The Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
The Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Verifying the IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
The Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
The System Settings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
The Ping Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
9 Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Changing the firewall settings before installing your printer . . . . . . . . . . 65
Direct Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
For installing host-based printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver . . . . . . . . . . 66
Network Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Network Printer Setup on a Local Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Contents 3
Setting Up for Web Services on Devices (WSD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Adding Roles of Print Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
WSD Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting Up for Shared Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Point and Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Peer-to-Peer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
11 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Installing the Drivers and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Using Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using the Operator Panel Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Status of Wi-Fi | WPS Button Backlight (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Keypad Letters and Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing Numbers or Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Inserting a Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Printing a Panel Settings Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
The Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
The Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Setting the Power Saving Timer Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
13 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting Up From Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting Up From Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4Contents
Overview of the Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Page Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Top Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Left Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Right Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Details of the Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Printer Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Print Server Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Print Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
14 Understanding the Tool Box Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Starting the Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Using the Tool Box to Change the Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Printer Settings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Printer Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Defaults Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Printer Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Paper Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Adjust Transfer Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Adjust Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Registration Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Adjust Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Reset Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Non-Dell Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Transfer Roller Refresh Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Web Link Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Contents 5
EWS (Embedded Web Server or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool). . . . 154
Scan Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Fax Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Copy Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Chart Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Environment Sensor Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Clean Developer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Refresh Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Resetting Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
15 Understanding the Printer Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Defaults Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Copy Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Scan Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fax Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Print from USB Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
MPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Report / List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Error History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Color Test Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Protocol Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fax Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Admin Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Secure Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Scan to E-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
USB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
6Contents
Panel Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Panel Lock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Enabling the Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Disabling the Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Resetting Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
16 Print Media Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Paper Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Recommended Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Unacceptable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Selecting Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Printing on Letterhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Loading Letterhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Storing Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Identifying Print Media and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Supported Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Supported Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Paper Type Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
17 Loading Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Print Media Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Loading Letterhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Loading an Envelope in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Loading Letterhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Loading Print Media When Manual Duplex Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
When Using the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
When Using the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Contents 7
Using the Output Tray Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing . . . . . . . . . . 227
18 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tips for Successful Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tips on Storing Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Avoiding Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Sending a Job to Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Canceling a Print Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Canceling From the Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Direct Print Using the USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Supported File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Printing a File in a USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Printing a Report Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
19 Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Loading Paper for Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Preparing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Making Copies From the Document Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Making Copies From the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Setting Copy Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Collated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Reduce/Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Document Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Original Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Lighter/Darker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Auto Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Multiple-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Margin Top/Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Margin Left/Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Margin Middle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
8Contents
Changing the Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
20 Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Scanning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Scanning from the Operator Panel - Scan to WSD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Printer Setup for Scan to WSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Procedures for WSD Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver . . . . . . . . . . 248
Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Confirming a Login name and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Specifying a Destination to Store the Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Configuring the Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Sending the Scanned File on the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Scanning to USB Storage Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Setting an E-Mail Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
21 Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Configuring Fax Initial Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Setting Your Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Setting the Printer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Setting the Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Changing the Clock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Setting Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Speaker Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Ringer Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Specifying the Fax Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Changing the Fax Settings Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Available Fax Settings Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Sending a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Loading an Original Document on the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Loading an Original Document on the Document Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Contents 9
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Original Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Lighter/Darker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Sending a Fax Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Sending a Fax Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Confirming Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Automatic Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Sending a Delayed Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Receiving a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
About Receiving Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans Machine/Fax Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Receiving Faxes in the Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Polling Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Automatic Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Group Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Setting Group Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Editing Group Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission) . . . . . . 284
Printing an Address Book List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Other Ways to Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Using the Secure Receiving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Using an Answering Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Using a Computer Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Printing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Changing Fax Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
10 Contents
Know Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
22 Understanding Your Printer Software
(Windows® Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Printer Status Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Status Monitor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Dell Supplies Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Quick Launch Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Address Book Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
ScanButton Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Dell ScanCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
23 Understanding Printer Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
24 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Operating System Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface . 301
MIB Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Copy Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Scanner Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Facsimile Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Maintaining Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
25 Maintaining Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Determining the Status of Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Conserving Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Contents 11
Storing Print Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Storing Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Replacing Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Removing the Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Installing a Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Cleaning Inside the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Adjusting Color Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Performing Auto Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Printing the Color Registration Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Determining Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Entering Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Cleaning the Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
26 Clearing Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Avoiding Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
27 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Basic Printer Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Display Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
The output is too light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Toner smears or print comes off/Stain on back side . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
12 Contents
Random spots/Blurred images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
The entire output is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Streaks appear on the output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Pitched color dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Vertical blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Mottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Ghosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Auger mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Wrinkled/Stained paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
The top margins is incorrect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Color registration is out of alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Protrudent / Bumpy paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Misfeed jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Multi-feed jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Copy Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Fax Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Scanning Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Wireless Problems (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only) . . . . . . 356
Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Contacting Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
B Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Dell Technical Support Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Online Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Warranty and Return Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Recycling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
New Zealand PTC200 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
General warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Contents 13
2.11.1 Compliance testing (6) & (7) (Functional tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.5.1 Off-hook line impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.9.3 Non-voice equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
5.6.1 General requirements (automatic dialling devices) . . . . . . . . . . . 361
5.5.5 User instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
8.1.7 User Instructions (automatic call set-up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
8.2.1(b) Call answering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
USA/Canada Wi-Fi Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Labeling requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
RF exposure warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Canada, avis d'Industry Canada (IC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Informations concernant l'exposition aux fréquences radio (RF) . . . . . . 363
Canada IC statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
14 Contents
15
Before Beginning
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings ..................................................... 17
1 Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer User's
Guide .................................................................................................. 19
2 Finding Information..................................................................... 21
3 Product Features......................................................................... 23
4 About the Printer......................................................................... 25
16
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings 17
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2012 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text:
Dell
and the
DELL
logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.;
Microsoft
,
Windows
,
Windows Server
,
Windows Vista, and
Internet Explorer
are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Macintosh
and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries; Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries; Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance; Wi-Fi Protected
Setup, WPA, and WPA2 are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
XML Paper Specification (XPS)
: This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions
upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369;
DES
: This product
includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@mincom.oz.au);
AES
: Copyright © 2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved.
This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms;
TIFF (libtiff)
: Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam
Leffler and Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.;
ICC Profile (Little cms)
: Copyright © 1998-2004 Marti Maria.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products.
Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.
____________________
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in
applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.
November 2012 Rev. A00
18 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer User's Guide 19
1
Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer
User's Guide
Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and operation of your Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw
Color Multifunction Printer. For information on other documentation included with your Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw
Color Multifunction Printer, see "Finding Information" on page 21.
NOTE: In this manual, Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer is referred to as the "printer."
Conventions
The following describe the meaning of the symbols and fonts used in this manual:
Bold texts :
• Names of hardware button on the operator panel.
• Screen names on the LCD panel.
• Menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen.
Texts in Courier New font :
• Menus and messages displayed on the LCD panel.
• Characters entered from the computer.
• Directory paths.
<> :
• Key on the keyboard of the computer.
→:
• Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.
" " :
• Cross references in this manual.
• Characters entered from the operator panel.
• Messages displayed on the computer screen.
20 Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer User's Guide
Finding Information 21
2
Finding Information
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
What are you looking for? Find it here
• Drivers for my printer
•My
User's Guide
Software and Documentation
disc
The
Software and Documentation
disc contains setup video, documentation,
and drivers for your printer. You can use the disc to install/re-install drivers or
access your setup video and documentation.
Readme files may be included on your disc to provide last-minute updates about
technical changes to your printer or advanced technical reference material for
experienced users or technicians.
How to use my printer
Quick Reference Guide
• Safety information
• Warranty information
Important Information
WARNING: Read and follow all safety instructions in the
Important Information
prior to setting up and operating your printer.
22 Finding Information
How to set up my printer
Setup diagram
Troubleshooting "Troubleshooting" on page 339
Express Service Code and Service Tag
The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the side door of your
printer.
• Latest drivers for my printer
• Answers to technical service and support
questions
• Documentation for my printer
Go to support.dell.com
support.dell.com provides several online tools, including:
• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and
online courses
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as printer driver
• Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair
information
•Downloads — Drivers
• Manuals — Printer documentation and product specifications
Go to support.dell.com. Select your region and fill in the requested details to
access help tools and information.
What are you looking for? Find it here
Service Tag
xxxxxxx
Express Service Code
000 000 000 00
Product Features 23
3
Product Features
This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.
Scanning to a USB Storage Device
With Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer,
you don't need a PC to connect your USB storage device to save
the scanned data. Insert your USB storage device in the port on
the printer, and save the scanned data directly to your USB
storage device.
For more information, see "Scanning to USB Storage Device"
on page 264.
Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper (Multiple-Up)
Multiple-Up Print allows you to print multiple pages on a single
sheet of paper. This feature allows you to reduce the paper
consumption.
For more information, see "Multiple-Up" on page 240.
2-Sided Printing (Manual Duplex Print)
Manual Duplex Print is to print two or more pages on the front
and back side of a single sheet of paper manually. This feature
allows you to reduce the paper consumption.
For more information, see "Loading Print Media When Manual
Duplex Printing" on page 224.
Print From USB Memory (USB Direct Print)
Print From USB Memory feature allows you to print directly
from your USB storage device without starting your computer.
Without requiring you to start your computer and an
application, this feature allows quick printing with simple
procedures.
For more information, see "Direct Print Using the USB Storage
Device" on page 231.
24 Product Features
Printing Through Wireless Connection (Wireless Print)
(Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
The Wireless LAN feature on your printer allows you to install
the printer at any location, and enables printing without a wired
connection to your computer.
For more information, see "Wireless Connection (Dell
C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)" on page 37.
About the Printer 25
4
About the Printer
This chapter provides an overview of your Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
Front View
1Operator Panel 2Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
3Document Feeder Tray 4Document Output Tray
5Toner Access Cover 6Print Head Cleaning Rod
7Power Switch 8Front Cover
9Paper Width Guides 10 MPF Extension
11 Length Guide 12 Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
13 Front USB Port 14 Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
19
79101114 8
65234
1213
26 About the Printer
Rear View
1ADF Cover 2Ethernet Port
3USB Port 4Wall Jack Connector
5Phone Connector 6Power Connector
7Rear Cover 8Transfe r Roller
9Paper Chute 10 Paper Feed Roller
11 Transfer Bel t 12 Levers
13 Security Slot
7
8
9
10
11
12 1
2
3
6
4
5
13
About the Printer 27
Space Requirements
Place the printer at a location such that there is adequate space for using the printer feeder and covers.
CAUTION: To avoid irregular screen image or malfunctioning of your printer, avoid placing the printer in direct sunlight with
the front cover opened.
596 mm/23.46 inches
262.5 mm/10.33 inches
379 mm/14.92 inches
292.5 mm/11.52 inches
339 mm/13.35 inches
409 mm/16.10 inches
144.3 mm/5.68 inches
100 mm/3.94 inches
28 About the Printer
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Operator Panel
For more information on the operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on page 91.
1ADF Cover
2Document Guides
3Document Glass
4Document Feeder Tray
123
4
About the Printer 29
Securing the Printer
To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock.
Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer.
For details, see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.
Security slot
30 About the Printer
Ordering Supplies
You can order consumables from Dell on the Internet when using a networked printer. Enter the IP address of your
printer in your web browser, launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the Order Supplies at: to
order toner for your printer.
You can also order toner cartridges by the following method:
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Dell Supplies
Management System
.
The
Dell Supplies Management System
window appears.
2
Select your printer from the
Select Printer Model
list.
3
If ordering from the web:
a
Select a web address from the
Select Reorder URL
list.
b
Click the
Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site
.
The
Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw Color MPF - Dell Supplies Management System
screen appears.
c
Enter the Service Tag, and then click
OK
.
The Service Tag is located inside the toner access cover of your printer.
Dell supplies web site appears.
If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone section.
Service Tag
xxxxxxx
Express Service Code
000 000 000 00
31
Printer Setup
5 Removing Packaging Material.................................................. 33
6 Connecting Your Printer............................................................. 35
7 Setting Up Your Printer............................................................... 47
8 Setting the IP Address ............................................................... 53
9 Loading Paper.............................................................................. 57
10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
........................................................................................................ 65
11 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh
........................................................................................................ 85
32
Removing Packaging Material 33
5
Removing Packaging Material
This chapter provides an overview of your Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
1
Remove the packaging material from the printer.
2
Lift and open the document cover.
3
Remove the protective sheet from the document glass.
34 Removing Packaging Material
Connecting Your Printer 35
6
Connecting Your Printer
Your Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer interconnection cable must meet the following
requirements:
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
Connection type Connection specifications
Wireless IEEE 802.11b/802.11g (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
USB USB 2.0 compatible
Ethernet 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX compatible
Wall jack connector RJ11
Phone connector RJ11
1Ethernet Port
2USB Port
3Wall Jack Connector
4Phone Connector
1
2
3
4
36 Connecting Your Printer
Connecting Printer to Computer or Network
Direct Connection
A local printer is a printer which is directly attached to your computer using a USB cable. If your printer is attached
to a network, go to "Ethernet Connection" on page 36.
To connect the printer to a computer:
1
Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are turned off and unplugged from the power
source/outlet.
2
Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the back of the printer.
3
Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of your computer.
CAUTION: Do not connect the printer USB cable to the USB port available on the keyboard.
Ethernet Connection
To connect the printer to a network:
1
Ensure that the printer, computer and any other connected devices have been turned off and all cables have been
disconnected.
2
Connect the Ethernet cable.
NOTE: Connect the Ethernet cable, only if you need to setup a wired connection.
USB port
Ethernet port
Connecting Your Printer 37
To connect the printer to the network, connect one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port at the rear of the
printer, and the other end to a LAN drop or hub.
To setup a wireless connection, see "Wireless Connection (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)" on
page 37.
Wireless Connection (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)
The specifications of wireless setting function are described below:
You can select a method to configure a wireless setting from the following:
Item Specification
Connectivity Wireless
Connectivity Standard IEEE 802.11b/802.11g compliant
Bandwidth 2.4 GHz
Data Transfer Rate IEEE 802.11b mode: 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps
IEEE 802.11g mode: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
Security 64 (40-bit key)/ 128 (104-bit key) WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK (AES)(IEEE
802.1x attestation function of WPA 1x non-corresponds), Mixed Mode PSK
Wi-Fi Protected Setup®(WPS)*1 Push Button Configuration (PBC), Personal Identification Number (PIN)
*1 WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK AES, WPA2-PSK
AES, WPA-PSK TKIP, Open (No Security)
WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi | WPS Button)*1
WPS-PBC (Operator Panel Menu)*1
WPS-PIN*2
Auto SSID Setup
Manual SSID Setup
*1 WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless
configuration, by starting WPS-PBC on the printer with the (Wi-Fi | WPS) button or operator panel menu, and then pressing the
button provided on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router. This setting is available only when the access point supports
WPS-PBC.
*2 WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wire-
less configuration, by entering PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through access point, is available
only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.
38 Connecting Your Printer
WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi | WPS Button)
You can start WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) by pressing the (Wi-Fi | WPS)
button.
NOTE: WPS-PBC is available only when the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router supports WPS-PBC.
NOTE: Before starting WPS-PBC with the (Wi-Fi | WPS) button, confirm the position of the WPS button (button name may
vary) on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router. For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access
point (Registrar) or router, refer to the manual supplied with the product.
NOTE: For more information on the (Wi-Fi | WPS) button, see "Status of Wi-Fi | WPS Button Backlight (Dell C1765nfw Color
Multifunction Printer only)" on page 93.
If a problem occurs or error messages are displayed on the operator panel, see "Wireless Problems (Dell C1765nfw Color
Multifunction Printer only)" on page 356.
1
Press and hold the
(Wi-Fi | WPS)
button on the printer for 2 seconds.
Ensure that the
(Wi-Fi | WPS)
button starts to flash and
Press WPS Button on WPS Router
appears on the operator panel.
2
Start the WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router within two minutes.
3
When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.
Connecting Your Printer 39
WPS-PBC (Operator Panel Menu)
You can start WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) from the operator panel.
NOTE: WPS-PBC is available only when the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router supports WPS-PBC.
NOTE: Before starting WPS-PBC, confirm the position of the WPS button (button name may vary) on the wireless LAN access
point (Registrar) or router. For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router, refer to
the manual supplied with the product.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Network
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
WPS
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Ensure that
Push Button Control
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Ensure that
Yes
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
Ensure that
Press WPS Button on WPS Router
is displayed, and start the WPS-PBC on the wireless LAN
access point (Registrar) or router within two minutes.
8
When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.
40 Connecting Your Printer
WPS-PIN
The PIN code of WPS-PIN can only be configured from the operator panel.
NOTE: WPS-PIN is available only when the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router supports WPS-PIN.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Network
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
WPS
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Ensure that
PIN Code
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Write down the displayed 8-digit PIN code or select
Print PIN Code
. The PIN code is printed.
8
Ensure that
Start Configuration
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
9
Ensure that
WPS AP Searching
is displayed, and enter the PIN code displayed on step 7 into the wireless LAN
access point (Registrar) or router.
NOTE: For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router, refer to the manual supplied with the
product.
10
When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.
Auto SSID Setup
NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Network
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Wireless Setup
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
The printer automatically searches the access points on wireless network.
6
Press the button until the desired access point appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
If the desired access point does not appear, go to "Manual SSID Setup" on page 41.
NOTE: Some hidden SSID may not be displayed. If the SSID is not detected turn on SSID broadcast from the router.
7
Enter the passphrase or WEP key.
When the encryption type of the selected access point is WPA, WPA2 or Mixed in step 6:
• Enter the passphrase, and then press the
(Set)
button.
When the encryption type of the selected access point is WEP in step 6:
• Enter the WEP key, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: A passphrase is an encryption key for WPA and WPA2 encryption which consists of 8 to 63 alphanumeric
characters. It may be described as a key on some access points or routers. For details, refer to the manual supplied with
the access point or router.
8
The
Restart System
screen appears and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.
Connecting Your Printer 41
Manual SSID Setup
NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Network
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Wireless Setup
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button until
Manual Setup
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Enter the SSID, and then press the
(Set)
button.
8
Select the network mode from
Infrastructure
and
Ad-hoc
depending on your environment, and then press
the
(Set)
button.
If you select
Infrastructure
, proceed to step 9.
If you select
Ad-hoc
, proceed to step 10.
9
Select the encryption type from
No Security, Mixed mode PSK
,
WPA-PSK-TKIP
,
WPA2-PSK-AES
, or
WEP
.
If you do not set security for your wireless network:
• Press the button until
No Security
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
To use Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK-TKIP, or WPA2-PSK-AES encryption:
a
Press the button until
Mixed mode PSK
,
WPA-PSK-TKIP
, or
WPA2-PSK-AES
appears, and then
press the
(Set)
button.
b
Enter the passphrase, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: A passphrase is an encryption key for WPA and WPA2 encryption which consists of 8 to 63 alphanumeric
characters. It may be described as a key on some access points or routers. For details, refer to the manual supplied with
the access point or router.
To use WEP encryption:
a
Press the button until
WEP
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
b
Enter the WEP key, and then press the
(Set)
button.
c
Press the button to highlight the desired transmit key from
WEP Key 1
to
WEP Key 4
, and then press
the
(Set)
button.
Proceed to step 11.
10
Select the encryption type from
No Security
or
WEP
.
If you do not set security for your wireless network:
• Ensure that
No Security
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
To use WEP encryption:
a
Press the button until
WEP
appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
b
Enter the WEP key, and then press the
(Set)
button.
c
Press the button to highlight the desired transmit key from
WEP Key 1
to
WEP Key 4
, and then press
the
(Set)
button.
11
The
Restart System
screen appears and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.
42 Connecting Your Printer
Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting
To change the wireless setting through an Ethernet or wireless connection from your computer, perform the
following.
NOTE: To change the wireless setting through wireless connection, ensure that the wireless connection setting is completed in
"Wireless Connection (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)" on page 37.
NOTE: The following settings are available when the network mode is set to infrastructure in "Wireless Connection (Dell
C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)" on page 37.
1
Check the IP address of the printer.
For details about how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Settings" on page 55.
2
Launch the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.
3
Click
Print Server Settings
.
4
Click
Print Server Settings
tab.
5
Click
Wireless LAN
.
6
Change the wireless setting of the printer.
7
Reboot the printer.
8
Change the wireless settings on your computer or access point accordingly.
NOTE: To change the wireless settings on your computer, refer to the manuals provided with the wireless adapter or if
your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using that tool.
Connecting Your Printer 43
Connecting the Telephone Line
NOTE: Do not connect your printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). This may damage the printer. To use a DSL, you
will need to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.
1
Plug one end of a telephone line cord to the wall jack connector and the other end to an active wall jack.
2
Remove the blue plug from the phone connector ( ).
3
To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, plug the telephone or answering machine line
cord into the phone connector ( ).
Wall jack connector
To the wall jack
Phone connector
Blue plug
Phone connector
To an external telephone or
answering machine
44 Connecting Your Printer
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy,
France and Switzerland), and you are supplied with a yellow terminator, insert the yellow terminator into the
phone connector ( ).
Turning On the Printer
WARNING: Do not use extension cords or power strips.
WARNING: The printer should not be connected to an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system.
1
Connect the power cable to the power connector on the rear of your printer (see "Rear View" on page 26).
2
Connect the other end of the cable to the power source.
Phone connector
Yellow terminator
Connecting Your Printer 45
3
Turn on the printer.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions in the operator panel to configure the initial settings of your printer.
46 Connecting Your Printer
Setting Up Your Printer 47
7
Setting Up Your Printer
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, and time when you turn on printer for the first time.
When you turn the printer on, the wizard screen to perform the initial setup appears on the operator panel. Follow
the steps below to set the initial settings.
NOTE: If you do not start configuring the initial settings, Ready appears on the operator panel in three minutes. After that, you
can set the following initial setup by enabling Power On Wizard on the operator panel or Dell™ Printer Configuration Web
Tool if needed.
NOTE: For more information on operator panel, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 163.
NOTE: For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 97.
1
Ensure that
Please Select Language
appears, and then select the language you want to use on the
operator panel from the following drop-down list, and then press the
(set)
button.
2
Press the
(set)
button to start setting the country.
3
Ensure that
Please Select Country
appears. Select your country from the drop-down list, and then press
the
(set)
button.
4
Ensure that
Please Select Time Zone
appears. Select the appropriate time zone from the following drop-
down list, and then press the
(set)
button.
English
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Nederlands
Dansk
Norsk
Svenska
Geographic Region Time Zone
Africa (UTC) Accra, Bamako, Dakar, Nouakchott
(UTC) Casablanca
(UTC +01:00) Algiers, Douala, Libreville, Luanda
(UTC +01:00) Tunis
(UTC +01:00) Windhoek
(UTC +02:00) Cairo
(UTC +02:00) Harare, Johannesburg, Kinshasa, Tripoli
(UTC +03:00) Addis Ababa, Khartoum, Mogadishu, Nairobi
48 Setting Up Your Printer
Americas (UTC -10:00) Adak
(UTC -09:00) Alaska
(UTC -08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -08:00) Tijuana
(UTC -07:00) Arizona, Dawson Creek, Sonora
(UTC -07:00) Chihuahua, Mazatlan
(UTC -07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Cancun, Mexico City, Monterrey
(UTC -06:00) Central America
(UTC -06:00) Central Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Saskatchewan
(UTC -05:00) Atikokan, Resolute
(UTC -05:00) Bogota, Lima, Panama, Quito
(UTC -05:00) Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Port-au-Prince
(UTC -05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -05:00) Grand Turk
(UTC -05:00) Havana
(UTC -04:30) Caracas
(UTC -04:00) Asuncion
(UTC -04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada)
(UTC -04:00) Blanc-Sablon
(UTC -04:00) Caribbean Islands
(UTC -04:00) Cuiaba
(UTC -04:00) Georgetown, La Paz, Manaus
(UTC -04:00) Thule
(UTC -03:30) St. John's
(UTC -03:00) Brasilia, Cayenne, Paramaribo
(UTC -03:00) Buenos Aires
(UTC -03:00) Greenland
(UTC -03:00) Miquelon
(UTC -03:00) Montevideo
(UTC -02:00) Noronha
Antarctica (UTC -04:00) Palmer Archipelago, Santiago
(UTC -03:00) Rothera
(UTC +03:00) Syowa
(UTC +06:00) Mawson, Vostok
(UTC +07:00) Davis
(UTC +08:00) Casey
(UTC +10:00) Dumont d'Urville
(UTC +12:00) McMurdo
Geographic Region Time Zone
Setting Up Your Printer 49
Asia (UTC +02:00) Amman
(UTC +02:00) Beirut
(UTC +02:00) Damascus
(UTC +02:00) Jerusalem
(UTC +02:00) Nicosia
(UTC +02:00) Palestine
(UTC +03:00) Aden, Baghdad, Qatar, Riyadh
(UTC +03:30) Tehran
(UTC +04:00) Baku
(UTC +04:00) Dubai, Muscat, Tbilisi
(UTC +04:00) Yerevan
(UTC +04:30) Kabul
(UTC +05:00) Aqtau, Aqtobe, Ashgabat, Samarkand
(UTC +05:00) Ekaterinburg
(UTC +05:00) Karachi
(UTC +05:30) Colombo, Kolkata
(UTC +05:45) Kathmandu
(UTC +06:00) Almaty, Bishkek, Dhaka, Thimphu
(UTC +06:00) Novosibirsk, Omsk
(UTC +06:30) Yangon (Rangoon)
(UTC +07:00) Bangkok, Ho Chi Minh, Hovd, Jakarta
(UTC +07:00) Krasnoyarsk
(UTC +08:00) Chongqing, Hong Kong, Shanghai
(UTC +08:00) Irkutsk
(UTC +08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Makassar, Manila, Singapore
(UTC +08:00) Taipei
(UTC +08:00) Ulaan Baatar
(UTC +09:00) Dili, Jayapura
(UTC +09:00) Pyongyang
(UTC +09:00) Seoul
(UTC +09:00) Tokyo
(UTC +09:00) Yakutsk
(UTC +10:00) Sakhalin, Vladivostok
(UTC +11:00) Magadan
(UTC +12:00) Anadyr, Kamchatka
Atlantic Ocean (UTC -04:00) Bermuda
(UTC -04:00) Stanley
(UTC -02:00) South Georgia Island
(UTC -01:00) Azores, Scoresbysund
(UTC -01:00) Cape Verde
(UTC) Reykjavik
Geographic Region Time Zone
50 Setting Up Your Printer
Australia (UTC +08:00) Perth
(UTC +08:45) Eucla
(UTC +09:30) Adelaide
(UTC +09:30) Darwin
(UTC +10:00) Brisbane, Lindeman
(UTC +10:00) Hobart, Melbourne, Sydney
(UTC +10:30) Lord Howe Island
Europe (UTC) Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London
(UTC +01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna
(UTC +01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Prague
(UTC +01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris
(UTC +01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb
(UTC +02:00) Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul
(UTC +02:00) Helsinki, Kiev, Riga, Sofia
(UTC +02:00) Kaliningrad, Minsk
(UTC +03:00) Moscow
(UTC +04:00) Samara
Indian Ocean (UTC +03:00) Antananarivo, Comoro Islands, Mayotte
(UTC +04:00) Mahe, Reunion
(UTC +04:00) Mauritius
(UTC +05:00) Kerguelen, Maldives
(UTC +06:00) Chagos
(UTC +06:30) Cocos Islands
(UTC +07:00) Christmas Island
Pacific Ocean (UTC -11:00) Midway Island, Niue, Samoa
(UTC -10:00) Cook Islands, Hawaii, Tahiti
(UTC -09:30) Marquesas Islands
(UTC -09:00) Gambier Islands
(UTC -08:00) Pitcairn Islands
(UTC -06:00) Easter Island
(UTC -06:00) Galapagos Islands
(UTC +09:00) Palau
(UTC +10:00) Guam, Port Moresby, Saipan
(UTC +11:00) Efate, Guadalcanal, Kosrae
(UTC +11:30) Norfolk Island
(UTC +12:00) Auckland
(UTC +12:00) Fiji, Marshall Islands
(UTC +12:45) Chatham
(UTC +13:00) Tongatapu
(UTC +14:00) Kiritimati
Geographic Region Time Zone
Setting Up Your Printer 51
5
Ensure that
Please Enter Date
appears. Specify the current date, and then press the
(set)
button.
6
Ensure that
Please Enter Time
appears. Specify the current time, and then press the
(set)
button.
7
Press the
(set)
button for Fax Setup.
If you want to skip the Fax Setup, press the
(Start)
button and then restart the printer.
8
Ensure that
Please Enter Fax Number
appears. Enter your fax number, and then press the
(set)
button.
9
Ensure that
Please Enter Name
appears. Enter a name, and then press the
(set)
button.
10
Press the
(set)
button, and then restart the printer.
Printer Setup Using the Software and Documentation Disc
1
Insert the
Software and Documentation
disc into your computer to start
Dell Printer Setup
.
2
Double-click the
Dell C1765 Installer
icon, and follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and
the printer.
NOTE: If the
Software and Documentation
disc does not automatically launch, try the following steps.
For Windows
®
XP, Windows Vista
®
, Windows 7, Windows Server
®
2003, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server
2008 R2:
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
(for Windows Vista and Windows 7)
→
Accessories
(for Windows Vista and
Windows 7)
→
Run
.
2
Ty p e
D:\setup.exe
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click
OK
.
For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:
1
Point to the bottom right corner of the screen, and then click
Search
→
Ty p e
Run
in the search box, click
Apps
,
and then click
Run
.
2
Ty p e
D:\setup.exe
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click
OK
.
52 Setting Up Your Printer
Setting the IP Address 53
8
Setting the IP Address
Assigning an IP Address
An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can include up to
three digits in each section, for example, 111.222.33.44.
You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack, IPv4, and IPv6. If your network supports both IPv4 and IPv6, select
Dual Stack.
CAUTION: Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues.
NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system administrator.
NOTE: When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 Mode, use the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. To open the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the link local address. To check a link local address, see "Verifying the IP Settings" on
page 55.
NOTE: Depending on the address class, the range of the IP address assigned may be different. On Class A, for example, an IP
address in the range from 0.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255 will be assigned. For assignment of IP addresses, contact
your system administrator.
You can assign the IP address by using the operator panel or using the Tool Box.
The Operator Panel
For more information on using your operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on page 91.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
1
Turn on the printer.
Ensure that
Ready
appears on the operator panel.
2
Press the
(Menu)
button.
3
Press the button until
System
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Admin Menu
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Network
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
6
Press the button until
TCP/IP
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
7
Press the button until
IPv4
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
8
Ensure that
Get IP Address
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
9
Press the button until
Panel
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
10
Press the button and ensure that
Get IP Address
appears.
11
Press the button until
IP Address
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
The cursor is located at the first three digits of the IP address.
12
Enter the value of the IP address using the numeric keypad.
13
Press the button.
The next three digits are highlighted.
14
Repeat step 12 and step 13 to enter all of the digits in the IP address, and then press the
(set)
button.
15
Press the button and ensure that
IP Address
appears.
54 Setting the IP Address
16
Press the button until
Subnet Mask
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
The cursor is located at the first three digits of the subnet mask.
17
Enter the value of the subnet mask using the numeric keypad.
18
Press the button.
The next three digits are highlighted.
19
Repeat step 17 and step 18 to set subnet mask, and then press the
(set)
button.
20
Press the
button and ensure that
Subnet Mask
appears.
21
Press the button until
Gateway Address
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
The cursor is located at the first three digits of the gateway address.
22
Enter the value of the gateway address using the numeric keypad.
23
Press the button.
The next three digits are highlighted.
24
Repeat step 22 and step 23 to set gateway address, and then press the
(set)
button.
25
Turn off and turn on the printer.
The Tool Box
NOTE: When you use IPv6 Mode for network printing, the Tool Box cannot be used to assign an IP address.
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Tool Box
.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click the name of Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in
Printer Name, and then click OK.
The
Tool Box
opens.
2
Click the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
3
Select
TCP/IP Settings
from the list at the left side of the page.
The
TCP/IP Settings
page is displayed.
4
Select the mode from
IP Address Mode
, and then enter the values in
IP Address
,
Subnet Mask
, and
Gateway
Address
.
5
Press the
Apply New Settings
button to take effect.
The IP address is assigned to your printer. To verify the setting, open the web browser on any computer connected to
the network and enter the IP address into the address bar on the browser. If the IP address is set up correctly, the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool displays in your browser.
You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer drivers with installer. When you use the
Network Installation feature, and the Get IP Address is set to Auto IP on the operator panel menu, you can
set the IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer selection window.
Setting the IP Address 55
Verifying the IP Settings
You can confirm the settings by using the operator panel, printing the printer settings report, or using the ping
command.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
The Operator Panel
1
Press the (
Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Network
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
5
Press the button until
TCP/IP
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
6
Press the button until
IPv4
appears, and then press the
(set)
button.
Check the IP address displayed on the operator panel.
The System Settings Report
1
Print the system settings report.
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel" on
page 175.
2
Verify the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are listed in the system settings report under
Wired
Network
or
Wireless Network
.
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your
printer, see "Assigning an IP Address" on page 53.
The Ping Command
Ping the printer and verify that it responds. For example, at a command prompt on a network computer, type ping
followed by the new IP address (for example, 192.168.0.11):
ping 192.168.0.11
If the printer is active on the network, you will receive a reply.
56 Setting the IP Address
Loading Paper 57
9
Loading Paper
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the priority sheet inserter while a printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.
NOTE: For printing envelopes, see "Loading Print Media" on page 211.
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
1
Open the front cover by pulling out the instruction sheet.
2
Pull the PSI out.
58 Loading Paper
3
Remove the instruction sheet attached to the PSI with adhesive tape.
NOTE: Read the instruction sheet before you use the PSI.
4
Pull the length guide forward until it stops.
5
Pull the MPF extension forward until it stops.
Loading Paper 59
6
Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum.
7
Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack
on a level surface.
8
Load paper on the MPF with the top edge first and with the recommended print side facing up.
60 Loading Paper
9
Adjust the width guides and length guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the stack of print media.
10
Slide the length guide towards the printer until it touches the print media.
NOTE: Depending on the size of print media, first slide the MPF extension backward until it stops, and then pinch the
length guide and slide it backward until it touches print media.
Loading Paper 61
11
Insert the PSI into the printer and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper tray.
12
Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is not standard plain paper.
If a user-specified print media is loaded in the MPF, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer
driver.
62 Loading Paper
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
1
Open the front cover.
2
Slide the PSI forward, and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper tray.
3
Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack
on a level surface.
Loading Paper 63
4
Load print media on the PSI with the top edge first and with the recommended print side facing up.
5
Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the stack of print media.
6
Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is not standard plain paper.
If a user-specified print media is loaded in the PSI, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer
driver.
64 Loading Paper
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®65
10
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running
Windows®
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status
Before installing the printer driver on your computer, check the IP address of your printer by performing one of the
procedures in "Verifying the IP Settings" on page 55.
Changing the firewall settings before installing your printer
If you are running one of the following operating systems, you must change the firewall settings before installing the
Dell printer software:
•Microsoft
®
Windows XP
•Windows Vista
®
•Windows 7
•Windows 8
•Windows Server
®
2008
• Windows Server 2008 R2
• Windows Server 2012
NOTE: For Windows XP, Service Pack 2 or 3 must be installed.
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
1
Insert the
Software and Documentation
disc into your computer.
2
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
3
Select
System and Security
.
4
Click
Allow a program through Windows Firewall
.
5
Click
Change settings
→
Allow another program
.
6
Check
Browse
.
7D:\setup.exe
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the
File name
text box, and then click
Open
.
8
Click
Add
, and then click
OK
.
Direct Connection Setup
For installing host-based printer driver
1
Insert the
Software and Documentation
disc into your computer to start
Dell Printer Setup
.
2
Click
Install Printer Driver and Software
.
3
Select
Personal Installation
, and then click
Next
.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer with a USB cable, and then turn on the
printer.
The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds to the next page automatically.
66 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
5
Click
Finish
to exit the wizard when the
Ready to Print!
screen appears. If necessary, click
Print Test Page
to print
a test page.
Personal Installation
A personal printer is a printer attached to your computer or a print server using a USB. If your printer is attached to
a network and not your computer, see "Network Connection Setup" on page 68.
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver
NOTE: Download and install the XPS printer driver at support.dell.com.
NOTE: The XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition,
Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012.
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Printers
.
3
Click
Add a printer
.
4
Click
Add a local printer
.
5
Select the port connected to this product, and then click
Next
.
6
Click
Have Disk
to display the
Install From Disk
dialog box.
7
Click
Browse
, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8
Click
OK
.
9
Select your printer name and click
Next
.
10
To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the
Printer name
box. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the check box displayed under the
Printer name
. Click
Next
.
Installation starts.
If the
User Account Control
dialog box appears, click
Continue
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.
11
As the driver installation is completed, click
Print a test page
to print a test page.
12
Click
Finish
.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.
1
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Printers
.
3
Click
Add a printer
.
4
Click
Add a local printer
.
5
Select the port connected to this product, and then click
Next
.
6
Click
Have Disk
to display the
Install From Disk
dialog box.
7
Click
Browse
, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8
Click
OK
.
9
Select your printer name and click
Next
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®67
10
To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the
Printer name
box.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the
Set as the default printer
check box. Click
Next
.
Installation starts.
11
If you do not share your printer, select
Do not share this printer
. If you share your printer, select
Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it
. Click
Next
.
12
As the driver installation is completed, click
Print a test page
to print a test page.
13
Click
Finish
.
Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2
1
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2
Click
Start
→
Devices and Printers
.
3
Click
Add a printer
.
4
When you use Windows Server 2008 R2, click
Add a local or network printer as an administrator
.
If the
User Account Control
dialog box appears, click
Yes
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired
action.
5
Click
Add a local printer
.
6
Select the port connected to this product, and then click
Next
.
7
Click
Have Disk
to display the
Install From Disk
dialog box.
8
Click
Browse
, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
9
Click
OK
.
10
Select your printer name and click
Next
.
11
To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click
Next
.
Installation starts.
12
If you do not share your printer, select
Do not share this printer
. If you share your printer, select
Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it
. Click
Next
.
13
As the driver installation is completed, click
Print a test page
to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the
Set as the default printer
check box.
14
Click
Finish
.
Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2012
1
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel
.
3
Click
Hardware and Sound
(
Hardware
for Windows Server 2012)
→
Devices and Printers
→
Add a printer
.
4
Click
Have Disk
to display the
Install From Disk
dialog box.
5
Click
Browse
, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
6
Click
OK
.
7
Select your printer name and click
Next
.
8
To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the
Printer name
box, and then click
Next
.
Installation starts.
68 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
9
If you do not share your printer, select
Do not share this printer
. If you share your printer, select
Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it.
Click
Next
.
10
As the driver installation is completed, click
Print a test page
to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the
Set as the default printer
check box.
11
Click
Finish
.
Network Connection Setup
Network Printer Setup on a Local Network
For installing host-based printer driver
1
Insert the
Software and Documentation
disc into your computer to start
Dell Printer Setup
.
2
Click
Install Printer Driver and Software
.
3
Select
Network Installation
, and then click
Next
.
4
Select
Local Installation
, and then click
Next
.
5
Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click
Next
. If the target printer is not displayed
on the list, click
Refresh
to refresh the list or click
Add Printer
to add a printer to the list manually. You may specify
the IP address and port name at this point.
If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select
I am
setting up this printer on a server
check box.
NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you can continue, you must enter a valid IP address.
NOTE: You can install the Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer, but the installation of using Windows Server 2008 is not
supported.
NOTE: If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows Security Alert is displayed:
•Windows Vista
•Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
•Windows 7
•Windows 7 64-bit Edition
•Windows 8
•Windows 8 64-bit Edition
•Windows Server 2008
•Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
•Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition
•Windows Server 2012
To continue installing the host-based printer driver, click
Unblock
or
Allow access
(for Windows Server 2008 R2
and Windows 7).
6
Specify the printer settings, and then click
Next
.
a
Enter the printer name.
b
If you want other users on the network to access this printer, select
Share this printer with other computers on
the network
, and then enter a share name that users can identify.
c
If you want to set a printer as the default, select the
Set this printer as default
check box.
7
Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click
Install
. You can specify folders in which
to install the Dell software and documentation. To change the folders, click
Browse
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®69
8
Click
Finish
to exit the wizard when the
Ready to Print!
screen appears. If necessary, click
Print Test Page
to print
a test page.
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver
NOTE: Download and install the XPS printer driver at support.dell.com.
NOTE: The XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition,
Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012.
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Printers
.
3
Click
Add a printer
.
4
Click
Add a network
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer
.
5
Select printer or click
The printer that I want isn't listed
.
6
Select
Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname
, and then click
Next
.
7
Select
TCP/IP Device
for
Device type
, and enter the IP address for
Hostname or IP address
, and then click
Next
.
If the
User Account Control Continue
dialog box appears, click
Continue
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.
8
Click
Have Disk
to display the
Install From Disk
dialog box.
9
Click
Browse
, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click
OK
.
10
Select your printer name and click
Next
.
11
To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the
Printer name
box, and then click
Next
.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the
Set as the default printer
check box.
Installation starts.
If the
User Account Control
dialog box appears, click
Continue
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.
12
As the driver installation is completed, click
Print a test page
to print a test page.
13
Click
Finish
.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.
1
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Printers
.
3
Click
Add a printer
.
4
Click
Add a network
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer
.
5
Select your printer or click
The printer that I want isn't listed
.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click
The printer that I want isn't listed
, go to step 6.
6
Select
Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname
, and then click
Next
.
70 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
7
Select
TCP/IP Device
from
Device type
, and enter the IP address for
Hostname or IP address
, and then click
Next
.
If the
User Account Control Continue
dialog box appears, click
Continue
.
8
Click
Have Disk
to display the
Install From Disk
dialog box.
9
Click
Browse
, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click
OK
.
10
Select your printer name and click
Next
.
11
To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the
Printer name
box, and then click
Next
.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the
Set as the default printer
check box.
Installation starts.
12
If you do not share your printer, select
Do not share this printer
. If you share your printer, select
Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it
. Click
Next
.
13
As the driver installation is completed, click
Print a test page
to print a test page.
14
Click
Finish
.
Windows Server 2008 R2
1
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2
Click
Start
→
Devices and Printers
.
3
Click
Add a printer
.
4
Click
Add a network
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer
.
5
Select your printer or click
The printer that I want isn't listed
.
NOTE: When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, Find a printer by name or TCP/IP screen appears where you can
find your printer using your printer name or TCP/IP.
If the
User Account Control
dialog box appears, click
Yes
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired
action.
6
Click
Have Disk
to display the
Install From Disk
dialog box.
7
Click
Browse
, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click
OK
.
8
Select your printer name and click
Next
.
9
To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the
Printer name
box, and then click
Next
.
10
If you do not share your printer, select
Do not share this printer
. If you share your printer, select
Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it
.
11
Click
Next
.
Installation starts.
12
As the driver installation is completed, click
Print a test page
to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the
Set as the default printer
check box.
13
Click
Finish
.
Windows 7 or Windows 7 64-bit Edition
1
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2
Click
Start
→
Devices and Printers
.
3
Click
Add a printer
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®71
4
Click
Add a network
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer
.
5
Select your printer or click
The printer that I want isn't listed
.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click
The printer that I want isn't listed
, go to step 6.
6
Select
Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name
, and then click
Next
.
7
Select
TCP/IP Device
from
Device type
, and enter the IP address for
Hostname or IP address
, and then click
Next
.
If the
User Account Control
dialog box appears, click
Yes
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired
action.
8
Click
Have Disk
to display the
Install From Disk
dialog box.
9
Click
Browse
, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click
OK
.
10
Select your printer name and click
Next
.
11
To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the
Printer name
box, and then click
Next
.
Installation starts.
12
As the driver installation is completed, click
Print a test page
to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the
Set as the default printer
check box.
13
Click
Finish
.
Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2012
1
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel
.
3
Click
Hardware and Sound
(
Hardware
for Windows Server 2012)
→
Devices and Printers
→
Add a printer
.
4
Click
Have Disk
to display the
Install From Disk
dialog box.
5
Click
Browse
, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
6
Click
OK
.
7
Select your printer name and click
Next
.
8
To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the
Printer name
box, and then click
Next
.
Installation starts.
9
If you do not share your printer, select
Do not share this printer
. If you share your printer, select
Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it.
Click
Next
.
10
As the driver installation is completed, click
Print a test page
to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the
Set as the default printer
check box.
11
Click
Finish
.
72 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your
desk. You can view and/or change the printer settings, monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering
replacement consumables. You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies.
NOTE: The
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a print
server.
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser. The printer
configuration appears on the screen.
You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
to send you an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or
intervention.
To set up e-mail alerts:
1
Launch the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
.
2
Click
E-Mail Alert
link.
3
Under
E-Mail Server Settings
, enter the
Primary SMTP Gateway
,
Reply Address
, and your or key operator's e-mail
address in the e-mail list box.
4
Click
Apply New Settings
.
NOTE:
Connection pending until printer sends an alert
is displayed on the SMTP server until an error occurs.
Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network
Before Installation
Before you start remote installation, perform the following procedures.
Allow Print Spooler to Accept Client Connections
NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7
64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit
Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2.
For Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008:
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
(for Windows Vista only)
→
Accessories
(for Windows Vista only)
→
Run
.
2
Ty p e
gpedit.msc
, and then click
OK
.
3
Click
Computer Configuration
→
Administrative Templates
→
Printers
.
4
Right-click
Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections
and select
Properties
.
5
On the
Setting
tab, select
Enabled
, and then click
OK
.
6
Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
(for Windows 7 only)
→
Accessories
(for Windows 7 only)
→
Run
.
2
Ty p e
gpedit.msc
, and then click
OK
.
3
Click
Computer Configuration
→
Administrative Templates
→
Printers
.
4
Right-click
Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections
and select
Edit
.
5
Select
Enabled
, and then click
OK
.
6
Restart the computer.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®73
Share the Firewall File and Printer
NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition,
Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012.
For Windows XP:
1
Click
start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Select
Security Center
.
3
Click
Windows Firewall
.
4
On the
Exceptions
tab, check the
File and Printer Sharing
check box, and then click
OK
.
For Windows Vista:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Select
Security
.
3
Click
Windows Firewall
.
4
Click
Change settings
.
5
Click
Continue
.
6
On the
Exceptions
tab, check the
File and Printer Sharing
check box, and then click
OK
.
For Windows Server 2008:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Double-click
Windows Firewall
.
3
Click
Change settings
.
4
On the
Exceptions
tab, check the
File and Printer Sharing
check box, and then click
OK
.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Select
System and Security
.
3
Click
Windows Firewall
.
4
Click
Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall
.
5
If the check boxes under
Allowed programs and features:
are dimmed, click
Change settings
.
6
Check the
File and Printer Sharing
check box.
Home/Work (Private)
or
Public
check box is automatically selected
according to your settings.
If
File and Printer Sharing Properties
dialog box appears, click
OK
.
7
Click
OK
.
74 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
Start Remote Registry
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8,
and Windows 8 64-bit Edition.
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Select
System and Maintenance (System and Security
for Windows 7
)
.
3
Click
Administrative Tools
.
4
Double-click
Services
.
5
Click
Continue
(for Windows Vista only).
6
Right-click
Remote Registry
and select
Start
.
7
Right-click
Remote Registry
and select
Properties
.
8
Change
Startup type:
to
Automatic
, and then click
OK
.
Disable User Account Control
NOTE: Disabling the User Account Control might leave the system vulnerable to virus attacks.
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows
Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2.
For Windows Vista:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Select
User Accounts and Family Safety
.
3
Click
User Accounts
.
4
Click
Turn User Account Control on or off
.
5
Click
Continue
.
6
Clear the
Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer
check box.
7
Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Double-click
User Accounts
.
3
Click
Turn User Account Control on or off
.
4
Click
Continue
.
5
Clear the
Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer
check box.
6
Click
OK
.
7
Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Select
User Accounts
.
3
Click
User Accounts
.
4
Click
Change User Account Control Settings
.
5
Move the slider to the bottom, and then click
OK
.
6
Click
Yes
.
7
Restart the computer.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®75
For Windows 7:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Select
User Accounts and Family Safety
.
3
Click
User Accounts
.
4
Click
Change User Account Control Settings
.
5
Move the slider to the bottom, and then click
OK
.
6
Click
Yes
in
User Account Control
dialog box.
7
Restart the computer.
Enable Network Discovery and File Sharing for all Public Networks
NOTE: This step is required when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition,
Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, and
Windows Server 2012 for the server computer.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Network and Internet
→
Network and Sharing Center
→
Change advanced
sharing settings
.
2
To allow your computer to be found on the network, and to allow other computers on the network to share the files
and folders on your computer, click
Turn on network discovery
.
3
Click
Save changes
.
4
If you see the
User Account Control
dialog box, click
Yes
.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition:
1
Click
Start
→
Network
.
2
Right-click
Network
and select
Properties
.
The
Network an Sharing Center
screen appears.
3
Click the down arrow button next to either
Network
discovery
.
4
To allow your computer to be found on the network, and to allow other computers on the network to share the files
and folders on your computer, click
Turn on network discovery
.
5
Click
Apply
.
6
If the
User Account Control
dialog box appears, click
Continue
.
Disable Simple File Sharing
NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, and Windows XP 64-bit Edition.
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Select
Appearance and Themes
.
3
Select
Folder Options
.
4
On the
View
tab, clear the
Use simple file sharing (Recommended)
check box, and then click
OK
.
5
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
6
Select
Performance and Maintenance
.
7
Select
Administrative Tools
.
8
Double-click
Local Security Policy
.
9
Click
Local Policies
→
Security Options
.
10
Right-click
Network access: Sharing and security model for local accounts
and select
Properties
.
76 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
11
Ensure that
Classic - local users authenticate as themselves
is selected.
12
Click
OK
.
Installing the Printer Driver
NOTE: Installation on Windows XP Home Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic, Windows Vista Home Premium, Windows Vista
x64 Home Basic, Windows Vista x64 Home Premium, Windows 7 Starter, Windows 7 Home Basic, Windows 7 Home Premium,
Windows 7 x64 Home Basic, and Windows 7 x64 Home Premium, Windows 8, Windows 8 x64, Windows 8 Pro, Windows 8 x64
Pro, and Windows Server 2012 is not supported.
1
Insert the
Software and Documentation
disc provided with the printer in your computer. The
Dell Printer Setup
file launches automatically.
2
Click
Install Printer Driver and Software
.
The
Choose an installation type
screen appears.
3
Select
Network Installation
, and then click
Next
.
4
Select
Remote Installation
, and then click
Next
.
5
Enter the Administrator user name and password of the client computer, then select the clients or servers, and then
click
Next
.
NOTE: If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows Security Alert is displayed:
•Windows Vista
•Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
•Windows 7
•Windows 7 64-bit Edition
•Windows Server 2008
•Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
•Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition
To continue installing the host-based printer driver, click
Unblock
or
Allow access
(for Windows Server 2008 R2
and Windows 7).
6
Check if the printer to be installed is listed in
Select Printer
, and then click
Next
.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in Select Printer, try the following steps:
•Click Refresh to update the information.
•Click Add Printer, and then enter a port name (any alphanumeric string of your choosing) and an existing IP address
for the printer.
7
Select the required items on
Software and Documentation
, and then click
Install
.
8
Click
Finish
to exit this tool.
Setting Up for Web Services on Devices (WSD)
This section provides information for network printing with WSD, the protocol of Microsoft for Windows Vista,
Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012.
Adding Roles of Print Services
When you use Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2, you need to add the roles of print services to the
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 client.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®77
For Windows Server 2008 R2:
1
Click
Start
→
Administrative Tools
→
Server Manager
.
2
Select
Add Roles
from the
Action
menu.
3
Check the
Print and Document Services
check box on the
Server Roles
window in the
Add Roles Wizard
, and
then click
Next
.
4
Click
Next
.
5
Check the
Print Server
check box, and then click
Next
.
6
Click
Install
.
For Windows Server 2008:
1
Click
Start
→
Administrative Tools
→
Server Manager
.
2
Select
Add Roles
from the
Action
menu.
3
Check the
Print Services
check box on the
Server Roles
window in the
Add Roles Wizard
, and then click
Next
.
4
Check the
Print Server
check box, and then click
Next
.
5
Click
Install
.
For Windows Server 2012:
1
Click
Server Manager
of the
Start
screen.
2
Select
Add Roles and Features
from the
Manage
menu.
3
Click
Next
on the
Before You Begin
window
→
Select installation type on the
Installation Type
window
→
Select
destination server on the
Server Selection
window in the
Add Roles and Features Wizard
.
4
Check the
Print and Document Services
check box on the
Server Roles
window, and then click
Next
.
5
Select features on the
Features
window
→
Confirm installation selections on the
Confirmation
window.
6
Click
Install
.
WSD Printer Setup
You can install your new printer on the network using Windows Add Printer wizard. When installing using the
Software and Documentation
disc that shipped with your printer, see "Network Connection Setup" on page 68 for
details.
NOTE: Installing WSD printer for Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012 is
available only with the Add Printer wizard.
Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard
1
For Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 R2:
Click
Start
→
Devices and Printers
(
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Printers
for Windows
Server 2008 and Windows Vista).
For Windows 8, Windows Server 2012:
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
(
Hardware
for Windows Server 2012)
→
Devices and Printers
.
2
Click
Add a printer
to launch the
Add Printer
wizard.
3
Select
Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer
.
4
In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click
Next
.
NOTE: In the list of available printers, the WSD printer is displayed in the form of http://IP address/ws/.
78 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address manually to create a WSD printer. To enter
the printer's IP address manually, follow the instructions below. For Windows Server 2008 R2, to create a WSD printer, you
must be a member of Administrators group.
1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click Next.
3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.
4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and click Next.
NOTE: Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7, perform one of
the followings:
•Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your computer.
•Add the printer driver to your computer in advance.
5
Install the printer driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation,
type the password or provide confirmation.
6
Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click
Finish
.
7
Print a test page to verify print installation.
a
For Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 R2:
Click
Start
→
Devices and Printers
(
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Printers
for
Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista).
For Windows 8, Windows Server 2012:
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
(
Hardware
for Windows Server 2012)
→
Devices and Printers
.
b
Right-click the printer you just created, and then click
Printer properties
(
Properties
for Windows Server 2008
and Windows Vista).
c
On the
General
tab, click
Print Test Page
. When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
Setting Up for Shared Printing
You can share your new printer on the network using the
Software and Documentation
disc that shipped with your
printer, or using Windows Point and Print or peer-to-peer method. However, if you use either of the Microsoft
methods you will not get features such as the status monitor and other printer utilities, which will get installed with
the
Software and Documentation
disc.
If you want to use the printer on a network, share the printer and install its drivers on all the computers on the
network.
NOTE: You need to purchase the Ethernet cable separately for shared printing.
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
1
Click
Start
→
Printers and Faxes
.
2
Right-click this printer icon and select
Properties
.
3
From the
Sharing
tab, check the
Share this printer
check box, and then type a name in the
Share name
text box.
4
Click
Additional Drivers
and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
5
Click
OK
.
If the files are not present in your computer, then you will be prompted to insert the server operating system CD.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Printers
.
2
Right-click the printer icon and select
Sharing
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®79
3
Click
Change sharing options
.
4
The "
Windows needs your permission to continue
" appears.
5
Click
Continue
.
6
Select the
Share this printer
check box, and then type a name in the
Share name
text box.
7
Select
Additional Drivers
and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
8
Click
OK
.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Printers
.
2
Right-click the printer icon and select
Sharing
.
3
Click
Change Sharing Options
if exists.
4
Select the
Share this printer
check box, and then type a name in the
Share name
text box.
5
Click
Additional Drivers
and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
6
Click
OK
.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2
1
Click
Start
→
Devices and Printers
.
2
Right-click the printer icon and select
Printer properties
.
3
On the
Sharing
tab, click
Change Sharing Options
if exists.
4
Select the
Share this printer
check box, and then type a name in the
Share name
text box.
5
Click
Additional Drivers
and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
6
Click
Apply
, and then click
OK
.
For Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2012
1
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
(
Hardware
for Windows Server 2012)
→
Devices and Printers
.
2
Right-click the printer icon and select
Printer properties
.
3
On the
Sharing
tab, click
Change Sharing Options
if exists.
4
Select the
Share this printer
check box, and then type a name in the
Share name
text box.
5
Click
Additional Drivers
and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
6
Click
Apply
, and then click
OK
.
To check that the printer is shared:
• Ensure that the printer object in the
Printers, Printers and Faxes, or Devices and Printers
folder is shared. The
share icon is shown under the printer icon.
•Browse
Network or My Network Places
. Find the host name of the server and look for the shared name you
assigned to the printer.
Now that the printer is shared, you can install the printer on network clients using the Point and Print method or the
peer-to-peer method.
80 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
Point and Print
Point and Print is a Microsoft Windows technology that allows you to connect to a remote printer. This feature
automatically downloads and installs the printer driver.
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
1
On the Windows desktop of the client computer, double-click
My Network Places
.
2
Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3
Right-click the shared printer name, and then click
Connect
.
Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer
object to be added to the
Printers and Faxes
folder. The time taken to copy varies based on the network traffic.
Close
My Network Places
.
4
Print a test page to verify installation.
a
Click
start
(
Start
for Windows Server 2003 / Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition)
→
Settings
(for Windows XP
/ Windows XP 64-bit Edition)
→
Printers and Faxes
.
b
Select the printer you have installed.
c
Click
File
→
Properties
.
d
On the
General
tab, click
Print Test Page
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1
Click
Start
→
Network
.
2
Locate and double-click the host name of the server computer.
3
Right-click the shared printer name, and then click
Connect
.
4
Click
Install driver
.
5
Click
Continue
in
User Account Control
dialog box.
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A new printer object is added to the
Printers
folder. The duration of this procedure may vary based on the network traffic.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®81
6
Print a test page to verify installation.
a
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
.
b
Select
Printers
.
c
Right-click the printer you just created and select
Properties
.
d
On the
General
tab, click
Print Test Page
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
1
Click
Start
→
Network
.
2
Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3
Right-click the shared printer name, and then click
Connect
.
4
Click
Install driver
.
5
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A new printer object will be added to the
Printers
folder. The time taken for these activities varies based on network traffic.
6
Print a test page to verify installation.
a
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
b
Select
Printers
.
c
Right-click the printer you just created and select
Properties
.
d
On the
General
tab, click
Print Test Page
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2
1
Click
Start
→
your user name
→
Network
(
Start
→
Network
for Windows Server 2008 R2).
2
Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3
Right-click the shared printer name, and then click
Connect
.
4
Click
Install driver
.
5
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A new printer object will be added to the
Printers
folder. The time taken for these activities varies based on network traffic.
6
Print a test page to verify installation.
a
Click
Start
→
Devices and Printers
.
b
Right-click the printer you just created and select
Printer properties
.
c
On the
General
tab, click
Print Test Page
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2012
1
Point to the bottom right corner of the screen, and then click
Search
→
Ty p e
Network
in the search box, click
Apps
, and then click
Network
.
2
Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3
Right-click the shared printer name, and then click
Connect
.
4
Click
Install driver
.
5
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A new printer object will be added to the
Printers
folder. The time taken for these activities varies based on network traffic.
82 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
6
Print a test page to verify installation.
a
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
(
Hardware
for Windows Server 2012)
→
Devices and Printers
.
b
Right-click the printer you just created and select
Printer properties
.
c
On the
General
tab, click
Print Test Page
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
Peer-to-Peer
If you use the peer-to-peer method, the printer driver is installed on each client computer. The client computers can
modify the drivers and handle the print jobs.
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
1
Click
start
(
Start
for Windows Server 2003 / Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition)
→
Settings
(for Windows XP /
Windows XP 64-bit Edition)
Printers and Faxes
.
2
Click
Add a Printer
to launch the
Add Printer
wizard.
3
Click
Next
.
4
Select
A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer
, and then click
Next
. If the printer is not
listed, type in the path of the printer in the text box.
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name
is the name assigned during the server installation process.
5
Click
Browse for a printer
, and then click
Next
.
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, specify the
location where the driver is available.
6
Select
Yes
if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click
Next
.
If you want to verify installation, click
Yes
to print a test page.
7
Click
Finish
.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Printers
.
2
Click
Add a Printer
to launch the
Add Printer wizard
.
For example:\\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®83
3
Select
Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer
, and then click
Next
. If the printer is listed, select the printer
and click
Next
, or select
The printer that I want isn't listed
and type in the path of the printer in the
Select a
shared printer by name
text box and click
Next
.
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The shared printer
name is the name assigned during the server installation process.
4
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, specify the
location where the driver is available.
5
Select
Yes
if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click
Next
.
6
If you want to verify installation, click
Print a test page
.
7
Click
Finish
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Printers
.
2
Click
Add a Printer
to launch the
Add Printer
wizard.
3
Select
Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer
, and then click
Next
. If the printer is listed, select the printer
and click
Next
, or select
The printer that I want isn't listed
and type in the path of the printer in the
Select a
shared printer by name
text box and click
Next
.
For example:
\\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The shared printer
name is the name assigned during the server installation process.
4
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, specify the
location where the driver is available.
5
Select
Yes
if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click
Next
.
6
If you want to verify installation, click
Print a test page
.
7
Click
Finish
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2
1
Click
Start
→
Devices and Printers
.
2
Click
Add a Printer
to launch the
Add Printer
wizard.
For example:\\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
84 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
3
Select
Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer
. If the printer is listed, select the printer and click
Next
, or
select
The printer that I want isn't listed
. Click
Select a shared printer by name
and type in the path of the printer
in the text box, and then click
Next
.
For example:
\\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name
is the name assigned during the server installation process.
4
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, you need to
specify the path to the available drivers.
5
Confirm the printer name, and then click
Next
.
6
Select
Yes
if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click
Next
.
7
If you want to verify installation, click
Print a test page
.
8
Click
Finish
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2012
1
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
(
Hardware
for Windows Server 2012)
→
Devices and Printers
.
2
Click
Add a Printer
to launch the
Add Printer
wizard.
3
Select
Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer
. If the printer is listed, select the printer and click
Next
, or
select
The printer that I want isn't listed
. Click
Select a shared printer by name
and type in the path of the printer
in the text box, and then click
Next
.
For example:
\\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name
is the name assigned during the server installation process.
4
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, you need to
specify the path to the available drivers.
5
Confirm the printer name, and then click
Next
.
6
Select
Yes
if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click
Next
.
7
If you want to verify installation, click
Print a test page
.
8
Click
Finish
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh 85
11
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running
Macintosh
Installing the Drivers and Software
1
Run the
Software and Documentation
disc on the Macintosh computer.
2
Double-click the
Dell C1765 Installer
icon.
3
Click
Continue
on the
Introduction
screen.
4
Confirm the installation location, and then click
Continue
.
5
Click
Install
to perform the standard installation.
6
Type the administrator's name and password, and then click
Install Software
.
7
Click
Continue Installation
.
8
Click
Restart
to finish installing the software.
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s)
When Using a USB connection
1
Turn on the printer.
2
Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.
3
Open the
System Preferences
, and click
Print & Fax
(
Print & Scan
for Mac OS X 10.7).
4
Click the Plus (+) sign, and click
Default
.
5
Select the printer connected via USB from the
Printer Name
list.
Name
and
Print Using
are automatically entered.
6
Click
Add
.
When Using Bonjour
1
Turn on the printer.
2
Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer
and printer.
3
Open the
System Preferences
, and click
Print & Fax
(
Print & Scan
for Mac OS X 10.7).
4
Click the Plus (+) sign, and click
Default
(Click the Plus (+) sign, and select the printer from
Nearby Printers
.
If there are no printers in
Nearby Printers
, select
Add Other Printer or Scanner
for Mac OS X 10.7).
5
Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the
Printer Name
list.
Name
and
Print Using
are automatically entered.
6
Click
Add
.
86 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh
When Using IP Printing
1
Turn on the printer.
2
Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer
and printer.
3
Open the
System Preferences
, and click
Print & Fax
(
Print & Scan
for Mac OS X 10.7).
4
Click the Plus (+) sign, and click
IP
.
5
Select
Line Printer Daemon - LPD
for
Protocol
.
6
Type the IP address for the printer in the
Address
area.
7
Select the model of your printer for
Print Using
.
NOTE: When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.
8
Click
Add
.
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11
When Using a USB Connection
1
Turn on the printer.
2
Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.
3
Start
Printer Setup Utility
.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.
4
Click
Add
.
5
Click
Default Browser
in the
Printer Browser
dialog box.
6
Select the printer connected via USB from the
Printer Name
list.
Name
and
Print Using
are automatically entered.
7
Click
Add
.
When Using Bonjour
1
Turn on the printer.
2
Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer
and printer.
3
Start the
Printer Setup Utility
.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.
4
Click
Add
.
5
Click
Default Browser
in the
Printer Browser
dialog box.
6
Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the
Printer Name
list.
Name
and
Print Using
are automatically entered.
7
Click
Add
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh 87
When Using IP Printing
1
Turn on the printer.
2
Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer
and printer.
3
Start
Printer Setup Utility
.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.
4
Click
Add
.
5
Click
IP Printer
in the
Printer Browser
dialog box.
6
Select
Line Printer Daemon - LPD
for
Protocol
.
7
Type the IP address for the printer in the
Address
area.
8
Select the model of your printer for
Print Using
.
NOTE: When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.
9
Click
Add
.
88 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh
89
Using Your Printer
12 Operator Panel ............................................................................ 91
13 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool..................................... 97
14 Understanding the Tool Box Menus....................................... 139
15 Understanding the Printer Menus.......................................... 163
16 Print Media Guidelines............................................................. 203
17 Loading Print Media ................................................................. 211
90
Operator Panel 91
12
Operator Panel
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
Using the Operator Panel Buttons
The operator panel has a 4-line by 28-character liquid crystal display (LCD), light-emitting diodes (LED), control
buttons, and numeric keypad, which allow you to control the printer.
1
One Touch Dial button
• Calls up the stored Fax number registered in the Phone Book. The first four fax numbers in the Phone Book
are assigned to the buttons in row order, starting from the top corner.
2
(Copy)
button
• Moves to the top level of the Copy menu.
3
(Fax)
button
• Moves to the top level of the Fax menu.
4
Data LED
• Lights up for incoming, outgoing, or pending Fax jobs.
5
Ready / Error LED
• Lights up when the printer is ready. (Ready LED)
• Lights up when the printer has an error. (Error LED)
6
button
• Moves a cursor or highlight right or left.
7
button
• Moves a cursor or highlight up or down.
8
(Set)
button
• Confirms the entry of values.
9
(Contacts)
button
• Moves to the Address Book menu for the Fax and Scan services.
10
(Re-dial / Pause)
button
• Calls up the last telephone number the printer dialed.
• Pauses a telephone number.
92 Operator Panel
11
(Cancel)
button
• Cancels the current processing or pending job.
12
B&W / Color LED
• Lights up to indicate which color mode is selected.
13
(Color Mode)
button
• Switches between color mode and black and white mode.
14
(Start)
button
• Starts the job.
15
(Backspace)
button
• Deletes characters and numbers.
16
(Speed Dial)
button
• Calls up a stored telephone number.
17
Numeric keypad
• Enters characters and numbers.
18
AC
(All Clear)
button
• Resets the current setting, and returns to the top menu.
19
(Back)
button
• Returns to the previous screen.
20
LCD Panel
• Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.
21
(Scan)
button
• Moves to the top level of the Scan menu.
22
(Menu)
button
• Moves to the top level of the Print From USB Memory, Job Status, and System menus.
23
(Wi-Fi | WPS)
button (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
• Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup
®
(Push Button Configuration). Lights up when it is activated, and blinks in
certain conditions.
NOTE: Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting. Make sure to press the
(Set) button to save the current entry or setting.
NOTE: For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter
Characters" on page 94.
Operator Panel 93
Status of Wi-Fi | WPS Button Backlight (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
This section describes when the backlight of the (Wi-Fi | WPS) button lights up or blinks.
For more information, see "Wireless Problems (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)" on page 356.
*1You can enable/disable the Wi-Fi settings. For more information, see "Wi-Fi (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)" on page 180.
Wi-Fi | WPS Button
Backlight
Wi-Fi
settings*1 Printer Status Error Message
Off N/A Connected to the network via Ethernet
cable; Wi-Fi settings is not available
when an Ethernet cable is connected to
the printer.
-
Off --
On The printer enters Sleep/Deep Sleep mode -
On On Wireless link established -
Blinking
normal
On Searching for wireless LAN access point or
router
-
Blinking
slowly
On Searching/Connecting with WPS access
point or router during wireless operation
-
Blinking
fast
On No wireless LAN access point or router
found within the specified time
Wireless Error
016-920 System Setup Fail
WPS Connection failure; Security setting
of the wireless LAN access point or router
is WEP, which is unsupported on WPS.
Wireless Error
016-921 System Setup Fail
94 Operator Panel
Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For example, when you set up your printer,
you enter your name or your company name and telephone number. When you store speed dial or group dial
numbers, you may also need to enter the corresponding names.
• When prompted to enter a letter, press the appropriate button until the correct letter appears on the display.
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6.
– Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O and finally 6.
– To enter additional letters, repeat the first step.
–Press the
(Set)
button when you are finished.
Keypad Letters and Numbers
Changing Numbers or Names
If an incorrect name or number is entered, press the (Backspace) button to delete the last digit or character.
Then enter the correct number or character.
Inserting a Pause
For some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone. A pause must be
entered in order for the access code to function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the
(Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on the display to indicate when a pause is
entered.
Key Assigned numbers, letters or characters
1@ : . / 1
2a b c A B C 2
3 d e f D E F 3
4g h i G H I 4
5j k l J K L 5
6m n o M N O 6
7p q r s P Q R S 7
8t u v T U V 8
9w x y z W X Y Z 9
00
*- _ ~
#@ . _ ! " # $ % & ' ~^ | ` ; : ? , (space) + - * / = ( ) [ ] { } < >
Operator Panel 95
Printing a Panel Settings Page
The panel settings page shows current settings for the printer menus. For details about how to print a panel settings
report, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 163.
Changing the Language
To display a different language on the operator panel:
The Operator Panel
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Panel Language
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until the desired language is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
The Tool Box
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Tool Box
.
NOTE: For details about starting the Tool Box, see "Starting the Tool Box" on page 139.
The
Tool Box
opens.
2
Click the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
3
Select
System Settings
from the list at the left side of the page.
The
System Settings
page is displayed.
4
Select the desired language from
Panel Language
, and then click
Apply New Settings
.
Setting the Power Saving Timer Option
NOTE: NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In
this case, enter the password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
You can set the power saving timer for the printer. The printer waits before it restores the default copy settings, if you
do not start copying after changing them on the operator panel.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
System Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Ensure that
Power Saving Timer
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button to select
Sleep
or
Deep Sleep
, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Press the or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
(Set)
button.
You can select from 5
–
30 minutes for
Sleep
or 1
–
6 minutes for
Deep Sleep
.
8
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
96 Operator Panel
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 97
13
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
Overview
NOTE: This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network.
One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is the E-Mail Alert Setup, which sends an e-mail to
you or the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention.
To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area, use the Printer
Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Enter the IP address of each printer on the
network to display the asset tag number.
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of
printing trends. If you are a network administrator, you can copy the printer settings to one or all printers on the
network using your web browser.
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
It is recommended that you configure the environment settings of your web browser before using the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be unreadable if the language differs from that of your web browser.
Setting Up From Web Browser
It is recommended that you configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel
before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
98 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
For Internet Explorer®
Setting Up the Display Language
1
Select
Internet Options
from
Tools
on the menu bar.
2
Select
Languages
in the
General
tab.
3
Specify the display language in order of preference in the
Language
list.
For example:
• Italian (Italy) [it-IT]
• Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl]
• German (Germany) [de-DE]
• French (France) [fr-FR]
• English (United States) [en-us]
• Danish [da-DK]
• Dutch (Netherlands) [nl-NL]
• Norwegian (Bokmal) [no]
• Swedish [sv-SE]
Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy
1
Select
Internet Options
from the
Tools
menu.
2
Click
LAN Settings
under
Local Area Network (LAN) settings
in the
Connections
tab.
3
You can configure the LAN settings in one of the following ways:
•Clear the
Use a proxy server for your LAN
check box under
Proxy server
.
•Click
Advanced
, and then specify the IP address of your printer in the
Do not use proxy server for addresses
beginning with
field under
Exceptions
.
After setting the language and proxy, enter <http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the IP address of your printer) in
the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For Firefox®
Setting Up the Display Language
1
Select
Options
from the
Tools
menu.
2
Click
Choose
in the
Content
tab.
3
Specify the display language in order of preference in the
Languages in order of preference
list.
For example:
•
English [en]
or
English/United States [en-us]
• Italian [it]
• Spanish [es]
•German [de]
•French [fr]
• Dutch [nl]
• Norwegian [no]
•Swedish [sv]
• Danish [da]
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 99
Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy
1
Select
Options
from the
Tools
menu.
2
Click
Advanced
tab.
3
Click
Network
on the
Options
dialog box.
4
Click
Connection
→
Settings
.
5
You can configure the LAN settings in one of the following ways:
• Select the
No Proxy
check box, if you do not want to use a proxy.
• Select the
Auto-detect proxy settings for this network
check box.
• Select the
Manual proxy configuration:
check box, and then enter a hostname and a port number if you have
a list of one or more proxy servers. If you have an IP address that does not use a proxy, enter the IP address of
your printer in the
No Proxy for:
edit box.
• Select the
Automatic proxy configuration URL:
check box.
After setting the language and proxy, enter <http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the IP address of your printer) in
the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Setting Up From Operator Panel
You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when EWS is set to Enable (the factory default) on
the operator panel. Check the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For more information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 163.
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the printer settings report or display the TCP/IP Settings
page, which lists the IP address. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings"
on page 55.
Overview of the Menu Items
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for:
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to get feedback on the printer status. When a toner cartridge is running low, click the
order supplies link on the first screen to order an additional toner cartridge.
Printer Jobs
Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page.
These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to change printer settings and view the settings in the operator panel remotely.
100 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for
communications.
Print Volume
Use the Print Volume option to check the number of pages printed for each paper size.
Address Book
Use the Address Book menu to view or edit the e-mail address, phone number, server address, and fax number
entries in the Address Book, or to register new entries.
Printer Information
Use the Printer Information menu to display the information of your printer.
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to get information about the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose
Feeder (MPF).
E-Mail Alert
Use the E-Mail Alert menu to receive an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention. Enter your name or
the key operator name in the e-mail list box to be notified. Set E-Mail Alert also when using the Scan to E-mail
feature.
Set Password
Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do
not inadvertently change the printer settings you selected.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Online Help
Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support web site.
Order Supplies at:
www.dell.com/supplies
Contact Dell Support at:
support.dell.com
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 101
Page Display Format
The layout of the page is divided into three sections.
Top Frame
The top frame is located on the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated, the
current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page.
The following items are displayed in the top frame.
1Dell C1765nfw Color MFP Displays the printer model name.
2IP Address Displays the IP address of your printer.
3Location Displays the location of the printer. The location can be changed in the Basic
Information on the Print Server Settings page.
4Contact Person Displays the administrator name of the printer. The name can be changed in the Basic
Information on the Print Server Settings page.
5Printer Bitmap Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu appears in the right
frame when you click the image.
102 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Left Frame
The left frame is located on the left side of all pages. The menu titles displayed in the left frame are linked to
corresponding menus and pages. You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.
The following menus are displayed in the left frame.
1Printer Status Links to the Printer Status menu.
2Printer Jobs Links to the Printer Jobs menu.
3Printer Settings Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.
4Print Server Settings Links to the Print Server Reports menu.
5Print Volume Links to the Print Volume menu
6Address Book Links to the Address Book menu.
7Printer Information Links to the Printer Status menu.
8Tray Settings Links to the Tray Settings menu.
9E-Mail Alert Links to the Print Server Settings menu.
10 Set Password Links to the Security menu.
11 Online Help Links to the Dell Support website.
12 Order Supplies at: Links to the Dell web page.
13 Contact Dell Support at: Links to the Dell support page web address: support.dell.com
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 103
Right Frame
The right frame is located on the right side of all pages. The contents of the right frame correspond to the menu that
you select in the left frame. For details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu Items" on
page 104.
Buttons in the Right Frame
1Refresh button Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the right
frame.
2Apply New Settings button Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to the printer.
The new settings replace the old settings of the printer.
3Restore Settings button Restores the old settings. New settings will not be submitted to the printer.
104 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. When you
access these menus, the authentication window appears on the screen. Enter a user name and password of the
administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.
The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can change only the password in
the Set Password page in the Security menu. For more information, see "Set Password" on page 132.
Details of the Menu Items
"Printer Status" "Printer Status"
"Printer Events"
"Printer Information"
"Printer Jobs" "Job List"
"Completed Jobs"
"Printer Settings" "Printer Settings Report" "Menu Settings"
"Reports"
"Printer Settings" "System Settings"
"Secure Settings"
"Copy Defaults"
"Copy Color Balance"
"Copy Settings"
"Scan Defaults"
"Fax Defaults"
"Fax Settings"
"Printer Maintenance" "Paper Density"
"Adjust Transfer Roller"
"Adjust Fusing Unit"
"Auto Registration Adjustment"
"Color Registration Adjustment"
"Clean Developer"
"Adjust Altitude"
"Reset Defaults"
"Non-Dell Toner"
"Clock Settings"
"Web Link Customization"
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 105
"Print Server Settings" "Print Server Reports" "Print Server Setup Page"
"E-Mail Alert Setup Page"
"Print Server Settings" "Basic Information"
"Port Settings"
"Wireless LAN (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer
only)"*1
"TCP/IP"
"E-Mail Alert"
"Bonjour (mDNS)"
"SNMP"
"Scan to PC"
"Reset Print Server"
"Security" "Set Password"
"IP Filter (IPv4)"
"Print Volume" "Print Volume"
"Address Book" "Fax/E-Mail" "Address Book - Top Page"
"Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"Address Book (Delete)"
"FAX Group - Top Page"
"FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"FAX Group (Delete)"
"E-Mail Group - Top Page"
"E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"E-Mail Group (Delete)"
"E-Mail Default Setup"
"Server Address" "Server Address - Top Page"
"Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"Server Address (Delete)"
"Tray Settings"
*1 This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.
106 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and specifications of the printer.
The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.
Printer Status
Purpose:
To check the status of the consumables and trays.
Val u es :
Printer Events
Purpose:
When faults such as
Out of Paper
or
Rear Cover is Open
occur, the details of all alerts or indications of faults are
displayed in the Printer Events page.
Val u es :
Printer Information
Purpose:
To display the system information of the printer. This page can also be displayed by clicking Printer Information in
the left frame.
Val u es :
Cyan Cartridge Level
Magenta Cartridge Level
Yellow Cartridge L evel
Black Cartridge Level
Displays the percentage of toner remaining in each toner cartridge.
When a cartridge is empty, a message appears. The text
Call or
Order
is linked to the Dell Printer Supplies website.
Paper Trays Status Ready Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is
unknown.
Add Paper Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.
Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Size Displays the size of paper in the tray.
Output Tray Status OK Indicates that the tray is available.
Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the output tray.
Cover Status Closed Indicates that the cover is closed.
Open Indicates that the cover is open.
Printer Type Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser is displayed normally.
Printing Speed Displays the printing speed.
Location Displays the location where the error occurred.
Details Displays the details of the error.
Dell Service Tag Number Displays Dell's service tag number.
Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag number of the printer.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 107
Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages. These pages show the
details of the status regarding each protocol or the print jobs.
Job List
Purpose:
To confirm the print jobs that are being processed. Click Refresh to update the screen.
Val u es :
Completed Jobs
Purpose:
To check the completed jobs. Up to 20 latest jobs are displayed. Click Refresh to update the screen.
Val u es :
Printer Serial Number Displays the serial number of the printer.
Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity.
Processor Speed Displays the processing speed.
Printer Revision Levels Firmware Version Displays the version of the controller.
Network Firmware Version Displays the NIC version.
ID Displays the job ID.
Job Name
Displays the file name of the job being printed
.
Owner Displays the name of the job owner.
Host Name Displays the name of the host computer.
Job Status Displays the status of the job being printed.
Job Type Displays the type of the job.
Host I/F Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time Displays the date when the print job was submitted.
ID Displays the job ID.
Job Name Displays the file name of the job.
Owner Displays the name of the job owner.
Host Name Displays the name of the host computer.
Output Result Displays the status of the job.
Job Type Displays the type of the job.
Impression Number Displays the total number of pages used by the print job.
No. of Sheets Displays the total number of sheets used by the print job.
Host I/F Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time Displays the date when the job was submitted.
108 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report and to configure the printer settings.
The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.
Printer Settings Report
The Printer Settings Report tab contains the Menu Settings and Reports pages.
Menu Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of your printer.
Val u es :
System Settings Power Saver Timer - Sleep Displays the time taken by the printer before it enters the power
saver timer - sleep after it finishes a job.
Power Saver Timer - Deep
Sleep
Displays the time taken by the printer before it enters the power
saver timer - deep sleep after it goes into the power saver timer
mode 1.
Auto Reset Displays the time taken by the printer before it automatically resets
the settings for Copy, Scan, or Fax on the operator panel to the
defaults when no additional settings are made.
Panel Select Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator
panel input is correct. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Panel Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator
panel input is incorrect. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Job Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job is
complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem
occurs. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Out of Paper Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer
runs out of paper. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Auto Clear Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before
the printer performs auto clear. Off indicates that the tone is
disabled.
All Tones Displays the volume of all the alert tones. Off indicates that all the
tones are disabled.
Job Time-Out Displays the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive
from the computer.
Panel Language Displays the language used on the operator panel.
Disable printing with larger
paper size
Displays whether to disable printing if the paper size set in the
printer driver and the paper size set in the tray of the printer does
not match (the paper set in the tray is larger).
Auto Log Print Displays whether to automatically print a job history report after
every 20 jobs.
mm/inch Displays the measurement unit used after the numeric value on the
operator panel.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 109
Secure Settings Panel Lock Set Displays whether to limit access to Admin Menu with a
password.
Software Download Displays whether to enable download of firmware updates.
Copy Service Lock Set Displays whether to enable the Copy service or to require a
password to use the service.
Scan Service Lock Set Displays whether to enable the Scan service or to require a
password to use the service.
Fax Service Lock Set Displays whether to enable the Fax service or to require a password
to use the service.
Print from USB Displays whether to enable the USB-Print service or to require a
password to use the service.
Secure Receive Set Displays whether to require a password to print incoming faxes.
Copy Defaults Color Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white.
Reduce/Enlarge Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Original Type Displays the default document type.
Document Size Displays the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default copy density level.
Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.
Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to
enhance text on the copy.
Copy Color Balance Color Balance (Red) Displays the color balance level of red.
Color Balance (Green) Displays the color balance level of green.
Color Balance (Blue) Displays the color balance level of blue.
Gray Balance Displays the gray balance level.
Copy Settings Multiple-Up Displays whether to enable the Multiple-Up feature.
Collated Displays whether to sort the copy job.
Margin Top/Bottom Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin Left/Right Displays the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.
110 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Scan Defaults Scan To Network Displays whether to store scanned image on a network server or on
a computer.
File Format Displays the file format to save the scanned image.
Color Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Resolution Displays the default scan resolution.
Document Size Displays the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default scan density level.
Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.
Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to
enhance text on the scanned image.
Margin Top/Bottom Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin Left/Right Displays the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.
TIFF File Format Displays the selected TIFF file format; TIFF V6 or TTN2.
Image Compression Displays the image compression level.
Max E-Mail Size Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.
Fax Defaults Resolution Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default density level to be used for fax transmission.
Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time.
Fax Settings Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode.
Auto Receive Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Receive Tel/Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Receive Answer/Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming
call.
Line Monitor Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is
made.
Ring Tone Volume Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an
incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when
Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Line Type Displays the line type.
Tone/Pul se Displays the dialing type.
Resend Delay Displays the interval between transmission attempts.
Redial Attempts Displays the number of redial attempts.
Redial Delay Displays the interval between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
Remote Receive Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code
on the external telephone.
Remote Receive Tone Displays the remote receive code to start Remote Receive.
Fax Header Displays whether to print the information of sender on the header
of faxes.
Fax Header Name Displays the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 111
Fax Number Displays the fax number to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting.
Sent Fax Forward Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified
destination.
Fax Forward Number Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming
faxes are to be forwarded.
Prefix Dial Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Number Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials before any auto
dial number is started.
Discard Size Displays whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax
page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper.
ECM Displays whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM).
Modem Speed Displays the fax modem speed.
Fax Activity Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after
every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Fax Transmit Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Fax Protocol Displays whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.
Country Displays the country where the printer is used.
Paper Density Plain Displays the paper density of plain paper.
Label Displays the paper density of labels.
Adjust Transfer Roller Plain Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for plain paper.
Plain Thick Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for thick plain
paper.
Covers Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for cover paper.
Label Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for labels.
Coated Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for coated paper.
Recycled Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for recycled paper.
Envelope Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for envelopes.
Adjust Fusing Unit Plain Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for plain paper.
Plain Thick Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for thick plain
paper.
Covers Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for cover paper.
Label Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for labels.
Coated Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for coated
paper.
Recycled Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for recycled
paper.
Envelope Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for envelopes.
Auto Registration Adjustment Displays whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Adjust Altitude Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
112 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Reports
Purpose:
To print the settings and history information of your printer.
Val u es :
Non-Dell Toner Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
Clock Settings Date Format Displays the default date format.
Time Format Displays the default time format; 24H or 12 Hour Clock.
Time Zone Displays the default time zone.
Set Date Displays the date setting.
Set Time Displays the time setting.
Web Link Customization Select Reorder URL Displays a link used for ordering consumables, which can be
accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Regular Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order
Supplies at: in the left frame.
Premier Displays the premier web address (http://premier.dell.com) that
can be linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Tray Settings MPF Paper Type Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.
MPF Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.
MPF Custom Size - Y Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Custom Size - X Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
Display Popup Displays whether to use a popup menu that prompts the user to set
Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
System Settings Click Start to print the system settings page.
Panel Settings Click Start to print the panel settings page.
Job History Click Start to print the Job History report.
Error History Click Start to print the Error History report.
Address Book Click Start to print the Address Book report.
Color Test Page Click Start to print the Color Test Page.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 113
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings tab contains the System Settings, Secure Settings, Copy Defaults, Copy Color Balance, Copy
Settings, Scan Defaults, Fax Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.
System Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic printer settings.
Val u es :
Power Saver Timer - Sleep*1 Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power saver timer mode 1 after it
finishes a job.
Power Saver Timer - Deep
Sleep
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power saver timer mode 2 after it goes
into the power saver timer mode 1.
Auto Reset Specifies the time taken by the printer before it automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or
Fax on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made.
Panel Select Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct, or disables
the tone.
Panel Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect, or disables
the tone.
Job Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job is complete, or disables the tone.
Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs, or disables the tone.
Out of Paper Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper, or disables the
tone.
Auto Clear Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear, or
disables the tone.
All Tones Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.
Job Time-Out Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print
job is cancelled if it times out.
Panel Language Used to set the language on the operator panel.
Disable printing with larger
paper size*2 Specifies whether to print jobs if the paper set in the tray of the printer is larger than the paper
size set in the printer driver (the paper size does not have to match).
Auto Log Print Specifies if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.
mm/inch*3 Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.
*1 Enter 5 in Power Saver Timer - Sleep to put the printer in the power saver timer mode five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less
energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you
notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum
warm-up time. Select a value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance between energy
consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer mode when it receives data from the computer. You
can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
*2 Disable printing with larger paper size is available only in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool and the Tool Box.
*3 The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory default.
114 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Secure Settings
Panel Lock
Purpose:
To restrict access to Admin Menu with a password, and to set or change the password.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel. When you change the password for the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool, click Set Password on the left frame and set the password.
Val u es :
Software Download
Purpose:
To set whether to enable download of software updates.
Function Enabled
Purpose:
To enable the services to be password-enabled, and allow the user to change it.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to limit the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print services. When you change the password for the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password you change on the left frame and set the password.
Val u es :
Secure Receive
Purpose:
Allows you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes. When the Secure Receive feature is enabled, the printer
stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock printing incoming fax. When changing the password for the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool, click Set Password on the left frame and set the password.
Val u es :
Panel Lock Set Restricts access to Admin Menu with a password.
New Password Sets a password that is required to access Admin Menu.
Re-enter Password Enter the new password again to confirm.
Copy Service Lock Set Allows you to set a password for the Copy Service feature.
Scan Service Lock Set Allows you to set a password for the Scan Service feature.
Fax Service Lock Set Allows you to set a password for the Fax Service feature.
Print from USB Allows you to set a password for the USB-Print Service feature.
New Password Sets a password required to use the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print services.
Re-enter Password Enter the new password again to confirm.
Secure Receive Set Allows you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes.
New Password Sets a password that is required to print incoming faxes.
Re-enter Password Enter the new password again to confirm.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 115
Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default copy settings.
Val u es :
Copy Color Balance
Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level.
Val u es :
Copy Settings
Purpose:
To configure the copy settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Val u es :
Color Selects mode for color or black and white copying.
Reduce/Enlarge Sets the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Custom Reduce/Enlarge Sets a custom reduction/enlargement ratio within the range of 25% to 400% when Reduce/Enlarge
is set to Custom.
Original Type Sets the copy image quality.
Document Size Sets the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Sets the default copy density level.
Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.
Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Color Balance (Red) Sets the color balance level of red.
Color Balance (Green) Sets the color balance level of green.
Color Balance (Blue) Sets the color balance level of blue.
Gray Balance Sets the gray balance level.
Multiple-Up Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.
Manual Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified in
Reduce/Enlarge.
Collated Sets whether to sort the copy job.
Margin Top/Bottom Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Margin Left/Right Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
116 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default scan settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Val u es :
Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Val u es :
Scan To Network Computer
(Network)*
Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block (SMB)
protocol.
Server (FTP) Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.
File Format Sets the file format to save the scanned image.
Color Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Resolution Sets the default scan resolution.
Document Size Sets the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Sets the default scan density level.
Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.
Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.
Margin Top/Bottom Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Margin Left/Right Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
TIFF File Format Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.
Image Compression Sets the image compression level.
Max E-Mail Size Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes.
The default is 2048 K bytes.
Resolution Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is
enabled only if the remote machine also supports the super fine resolution.
Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
Lighter/Darker Sets the default density level to be used for fax transmission.
Delayed Start Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 117
Fax Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Val u es :
Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the
handset of the external telephone, and then pressing the remote receive code.
Fax* Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone/Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the
time specified in Auto Receive Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal
speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Answer
Machine/
Fax
The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode,
the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones.
If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country (such as
Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland),
this mode is not supported.
DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a
distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone
company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for
faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that
specific ring pattern.
Auto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming
call.
Auto Receive Tel/Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone
receives an incoming call.
Auto Receive Answer/Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering
machine receives an incoming call.
Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal
speaker until a connection is made.
Ring Tone Volume Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through
the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Teleph one/Fax.
Line Type Sets the line type.
Tone/Pulse Sets the dialing type.
Resend Delay Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.
Redial Attempts Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy. If you
enter 0, the printer will not redial.
Redial Delay Specifies the interval between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax
numbers registered in the Phone Book.
Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Receive Tone Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.
Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Fax Header Name Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters
can be entered.
118 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab contains the Paper Density, Adjust Transfer Roller, Adjust Fusing Unit, Auto
Registration Adjustment, Color Registration Adjustment, Clean Developer, Adjust Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-
Dell Toner, Clock Settings, and Web Link Customization pages.
Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Val u es :
Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a service provided by some
telephone companies.
Sent Fax Forward Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Fax Forward Number Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Prefix Dial Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Number Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is
started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not
fit onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it
onto the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.
ECM Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the
ECM.
Modem Speed Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.
Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.
Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or
only when an error occurs.
Fax Protocol Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.
Country Sets the country where the printer is used.
Plain Sets the paper density of plain paper.
Label Sets the paper density of labels.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 119
Adjust Transfer Roller
Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller. To decrease the voltage, set negative
values. To increase the voltage, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to
increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Val u es :
Adjust Fusing Unit
Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To decrease the temperature, set
negative values. To increase the temperature, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to
decrease the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Val u es :
Auto Registration Adjustment
Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Plain Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Plain Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick plain paper within the range
of -3 to 3.
Covers Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Label Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels within the range of -3 to 3.
Coated Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Recycled Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled paper within the range
of -3 to 3.
Envelope Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.
Plain Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Plain Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Covers Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Label Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for labels within the range of -3 to 3.
Coated Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for coated paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Recycled Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for recycled paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Envelope Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.
120 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Color Registration Adjustment
Purpose:
To automatically adjust color registration.
Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to
a different location.
NOTE: The Color Registration Adjustment feature can be configured when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.
Val u e s:
Clean Developer
Purpose:
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge, to use up a toner cartridge when you need to
replace it before the end of its life, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
Val u es :
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are
performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Val u es :
Auto Correct Click Start to automatically correct color registration.
Color Registration
Adjustment 1 (Lateral)
Specifies lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for Y
(Yellow), M (Magenta), C (Cyan) within the range of -5 to +5.
Color Registration
Adjustment 2 (Process)
Specifies process (paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for LY (Left Yellow),
LM (Left Magenta), LC (Left Cyan), RY (Right Yellow), RM (Right Magenta), and RC (Right
Cyan) within the range of -5 to +5.
Clean Developer Click Start to stir the toner in the toner cartridge.
Yellow Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.
Magenta Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.
Cyan Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.
Black Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.
0 meter* Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
1000 meters
2000 meters
3000 meters
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 121
Reset Defaults
Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) memory for system parameters, Address Book data for fax, or Address Book
data for e-mail. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to
their default values.
Val u es :
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the
reliability of your printer. Dell recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty
coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart the printer.
Clock Settings
Purpose:
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Val u es :
Reset Defaults and Restart
Printer
Click Start to initialize the system parameters.
Reset Defaults of User (Fax)
Section
Click Start to initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.
Reset Defaults of User
(Scan) Section
Click Start to initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.
Date Format*1 yy/mm/dd Specifies the date format.
mm/dd/yy
dd/mm/yy
Time Format 12 Hour Clock*Specifies the time format.
24H
Time Zone Specifies the time zone.
Set Date Specifies the current date.
Set Time Specifies the current time.
*1 The default for Date Format varies depending on country-specific factory default.
122 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Web Link Customization
Purpose:
To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Val u es :
Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for
communications.
The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.
Print Server Reports
The Print Server Reports tab contains the Print Server Setup Page and E-Mail Alert Setup Page.
Print Server Setup Page
Purpose:
To verify the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) and printing ports. On
this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages in the Print
Server Settings tab.
Val u es :
Select Reorder URL Select the Regular or Premier web address to be linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Regular Displays the regular web address (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to
Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Premier Displays the premier web address (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to
Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Ethernet*1 Ethernet Settings Displays the current settings of Ethernet transmission rate and the
duplex settings.
Current Ethernet Settings Displays the current Ethernet settings.
MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the printer.
Wireless*2Wireless LAN Displays whether to enable wireless connection.
SSID Displays the name that identifies the network.
Network Type Displays the network type from either the Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure
mode.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless printer setting.
Link Channel Displays the channel number of the connection.
Link Quality Displays the quality of the connection.
Encryption Displays the security method.
Transmit Key Displays the transmit key.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 123
TCP/IP Settings Host Name Displays the host name.
IP Mode Displays the IP mode.
IPv4 IP Address Mode Displays the IP address mode.
IP Address Displays the IP address.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
Gateway Address Displays the gateway address.
IPv6 Use Manual Address Displays the manual IP address.
Manual Address Displays the IP address.
Stateless Address 1-3 Displays the stateless addresses.
Link Local Address Displays the link local address.
Manual Gateway Address Displays the gateway address.
Auto Configure Gateway
Address
Displays the gateway address.
DNS IPv4 Get DNS Server Address from
DHCP
Displays if the printer receives
the DNS server address
automatically from the DHCP
server.
Manual DNS Server Address Displays the DNS server address.
IPv6 Manual DNS Server Address Displays the DNS server address.
LPD Port Status Displays the port status.
Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.
Bonjour (mDNS) Port Status Displays the port status.
Port9100 Port Status Displays the port status.
Port Number Displays the port number.
Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.
HTTP Port Status Displays the port status.
Port Number Displays the port number.
Simultaneous Connections Displays the number of connections received simultaneously by the
client.
Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.
WSD Port Status Displays the WSD (Web Services on Devices) port status.
Port Number Displays the WSD port number.
Receive Time-Out Displays the receive time-out period.
Notification Time-Out Displays the notification time-out period.
Maximum Number of TTL Displays the maximum number of TTLs.
Maximum Number of
Notification
Displays the maximum number of notifications.
SNMP Port Status Displays the port status.
FTP Client Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.
FTP Passive Displays whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.
SMB Client Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.
*1 This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wired network.
*2 This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.
124 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
E-Mail Alert Setup Page
Purpose:
To verify the current settings of SMTP/POP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol/Post Office Protocol) used for the e-mail
feature and e-mail alert feature. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the
settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.
Val u es :
E-Mail Alert Setup Page Port Status Displays the port status.
Primary SMTP Gateway Displays the primary SMTP gateway.
SMTP Port Number Displays the SMTP port number.
E-Mail Send Authentication Displays the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
POP3 Server Address Displays the POP3 server address.
POP3 Port Number Displays the POP3 port number.
Reply Address Displays the reply e-mail address sent with each e-mail alert.
SMTP Server Connection Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.
E-Mail Alert Settings E-Mail List 1 Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the e-mail alert feature
specified in E-Mail List 1.
Select Alerts for List 1 Supplies Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for consumables.
Paper Handling Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for paper handling.
Service Call Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for service calls.
E-Mail List 2 Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the e-mail alert feature
specified in E-Mail List 2.
Select Alerts for List 2 Supplies Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for consumables.
Paper Handling Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for paper handling.
Service Call Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for service calls.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 125
Print Server Settings
The Print Server Settings tab contains the Basic Information, Port Settings, Wireless LAN, TCP/IP, E-Mail Alert,
Bonjour (mDNS), SNMP, Scan To PC, and Reset Print Server pages.
Basic Information
Purpose:
To configure the basic information of the printer.
NOTE: The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame, Printer Status page, Job List page, and Completed
Jobs page.
Val u es :
System Settings Printer Name Specifies the name of the printer using up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Location Specifies the location of the printer using up to 63 alphanumeric
characters.
Contact Person Specifies the contact name, number, and other information of the
administrator and service center using up to 63 alphanumeric
characters.
Administrator E-Mail
Address
Specifies the contact address of the administrator and service
center using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
Asset Tag Number Enter the asset tag number for the printer.
EWS Settings Auto Refresh Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages.
Auto Refresh Interval Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status
display pages automatically from 15 to 600 seconds.
126 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Port Settings
Purpose:
To enable or disable printing connectors and management protocol features.
NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted. When you change or configure the
settings, click Apply new settings to apply the new settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Val u es :
Ethernet*1 Ethernet Settings Auto*Detects Ethernet transmission
rate and the duplex settings
automatically.
10Base-T Half-Duplex Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex as
the default value.
10Base-T Full-Duplex Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex as
the default value.
100Base-TX Half-Duplex Selects 100Base-TX Half-Duplex
as the default value.
100Base-TX Full-Duplex Selects 100Base-TX Full-Duplex
as the default value.
Current Ethernet Settings Displays the current settings of Ethernet.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the printer.
Port Status LPD Specifies whether to enable LPD.
Port9100 Specifies whether to enable Port9100.
E-Mail Alert Specifies whether to enable the E-Mail Alert feature.
SNMP Specifies whether to enable the SNMP.
WSD Specifies whether to enable the WSD port.
Bonjour (mDNS) Specifies whether to enable the Bonjour (mDNS) feature.
Status Messager Specifies whether to enable the Status Messager.
*1 This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wired network.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 127
Wireless LAN (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
Purpose:
To con figure wireless network settings.
To connect the printer with a wireless network, be sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable.
NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Val u es :
Wireless Settings Wireless LAN Specifies whether to enable wireless connection.
SSID Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network using up to
32 alphanumeric characters.
Network Type Specifies the network type from either Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless network setting of the
printer.
Link Channel Displays the channel number of the wireless connection of the
printer.
Link Quality Displays the quality of the wireless network connection of the
printer.
Security Settings Encryption Select the security method from the list.
No Security*Specifies No Security to
configure the wireless setting
without specifying a security
method from WEP, WPA-PSK
TKIP/WPA2-PSK AES, and
Mixed Mode PSK.
WEP 64 Bit ASCII (5 Bytes) Specifies the WEP 64 Bit ASCII
to use through the wireless
network.
WEP 128 Bit ASCII (13 Bytes) Specifies the WEP 128 Bit
ASCII to use through the
wireless network.
WEP 64 Bit Hex (10 Bytes) Specifies the WEP 64 Bit Hex to
use through the wireless
network.
WEP 128 Bit Hex (26 Bytes) Specifies the WEP 128 Bit Hex
to use through the wireless
network.
WPA-PSK TKIP*1 Specifies the WPA-PSK TKIP to
use through the wireless
network.
WPA2-PSK AES*1 Specifies the WPA2-PSK AES to
use through the wireless
network.
Mixed Mode PSK Specifies the Mixed Mode PSK
to use through the wireless
network.
128 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.
Val u es :
WEP Key 1 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.
Re-enter WEP Key 1 Enter the WEP key 1 again to confirm.
WEP Key 2 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.
Re-enter WEP Key 2 Enter the WEP key 2 again to confirm.
WEP Key 3 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.
Re-enter WEP Key 3 Enter the WEP key 3 again to confirm.
WEP Key 4 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.
Re-enter WEP Key 4 Enter the WEP key 4 again to confirm.
Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key type from the list.
Pass Phrase Specifies the passphrase.
Re-enter Pass Phrase Enter the passphrase again to confirm.
*1 This item is available only when the Infrastructure mode is selected for Network Type.
TCP/IP Settings Host Name Specifies the host name.
IP Mode Specifies the IP mode.
IPv4 IP Address Mode Selects the IP address mode.
Manual IP Address Manually sets the IP address.
Manual Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask.
Manual Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway
address.
IPv6 Use Manual Address To set the IP address manually.
Manual Address Manually sets the IP address. To
specify an IPv6 address, enter the
address followed by a slash (/)
and then "64". For details,
consult your system
administrator.
Stateless Address 1-3 Displays the stateless addresses.
Link Local Address Displays the link local address.
Manual Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway
address.
Auto Configure Gateway
Address
Displays the gateway address.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 129
E-Mail Alert
Purpose:
To configure settings for E-Mail Alert. This page can also be displayed by clicking E-Mail Alert in the left frame.
Val u es :
DNS DNS Domain Name Specifies the domain name of the domain name server. Up to 255
alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can be used. If you
need to specify more than one domain name, separate them using a
comma or semicolon.
IPv4 Get DNS Server Address from
DHCP
Specifies whether to get the
DNS server address
automatically from the DHCP
server.
Manual DNS Server Address Sets the DNS server address.
IPv6 Manual DNS Server Address Sets the DNS server address.
LPD Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1000 seconds.
IP Filter (IPv4) Specifies the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied
access to the printer.
Port9100 Port Number Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.
Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 1000 seconds.
IP Filter (IPv4) Specifies the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied
access to the printer.
HTTP Port Number Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between 8000 and 9999.
Simultaneous Connections Displays the maximum number of connections received
simultaneously by the client.
Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255 seconds.
WSD Port Number Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between 8000 and 9999.
Receive
Time-Out
Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Notification Delivery Time-
Out
Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
Maximum Number of TTL Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.
Maximum Number of
Notification
Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20.
E-Mail Server Settings Primary SMTP Gateway Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
SMTP Port Number Specifies the SMTP port number. This must be 25, 587 or between
5000 and 65535.
E-Mail Send Authentication Specifies the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
SMTP Login User Specifies the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters,
periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If
specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.
SMTP Login Password Specifies the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Re-enter SMTP Login
Password
Enter the SMTP account password again to confirm.
130 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Bonjour (mDNS)
Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings for Bonjour.
Val u e s:
POP3 Server Address Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address format of
"aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.
POP3 Port Number Specifies the POP3 server port number. This must be 110 or
between 5000 and 65535.
POP User Name Specifies the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can
be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using
commas.
POP User Password Specifies the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Re-enter POP User Password Enter the password again to confirm.
Reply Address Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each e-mail alert.
SMTP Server Connection Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.
E-Mail Alert Settings E-Mail List 1 Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the e-mail alert feature using
up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Select Alerts for List 1 Supplies Alerts Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for consumables.
Paper Handling Alerts Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for paper handling
and/or service calls.
E-Mail List 2 Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the e-mail alert feature using
up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Select Alerts for List 2 Supplies Alerts Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for consumables.
Paper Handling Alerts Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for paper handling
and/or service calls.
Host Name Specifies the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-" (dash). The original setting will
remain valid if nothing is entered.
Printer Name Specifies the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 131
SNMP
Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.
Val u es :
Community Name Community Name
(Read only)
Specifies the community name to access (read only) data using up
to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The original setting will remain valid if nothing is entered.
Characters entered for community name in the previous settings
will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read Community
is public.
Re-enter Community Name (Read
only)
Enter the community name to access (read only) data again to
confirm.
Community Name (Read/Write) Specifies the community name to access (read and write) data
using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The original setting will remain valid if nothing is entered.
Characters entered for community name in the previous settings
will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read/Write
Community is private.
Re-enter Community Name
(Read/Write)
Enter the community name to access (read and write) data again
to confirm.
Community Name (Trap) Specifies the community name used for trap up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
The original settings will remain valid if nothing is entered.
Characters entered for community name in the previous settings
will not be displayed on the screen. The default Trap Community
is " " (NULL).
Re-enter Community Name (Trap) Enter the community name used for trap again to confirm.
Trap Notification 1-4 Trap Address Type Select the trap address type from the list. Selecting Off clears the
settings in Trap Address, Port Number, and Notify, and does not
notify trap occurrence. Selecting IPv4 or IPv6 allows you to enter
Trap Address.
Trap Address Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the following format:
•IPv4
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each section of "nnn" is a
variable value between 0 and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-
254 are not valid for the first three-digits only. The IP socket
mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65535.
•IPv6
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm format.
Each section of "xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value between 0
and ffff. The IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0
and 65535.
Trap Notification (IP) Port
Number
Enter the SNMP trap destination port number.
Notify Specifies whether to notify trap occurrence.
Authenticate Error Trap Specifies whether to notify Authenticate Error Trap.
132 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Scan to PC
Purpose:
To specify the client when scanning data.
Val u es :
Reset Print Server
Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for the network feature and reboot the printer. You can also initialize the
NVM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.
Val u es :
Security
The Security tab contains the Set Password and IP Filter (IPv4) pages.
Set Password
Purpose:
To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer from the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame.
NOTE: If you forgot your password, initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) to restore the password to the default (NULL). See
"Reset Print Server" on page 132.
NOTE: When you change the password to lock the operator panel, set the password from Panel Lock Set in the Printer Settings.
Val u es :
FTP Client Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
FTP Passive Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.
SMB Client Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
Initialize NIC NVRAM
memory and restart printer.
Click Start to initialize NVM. Network settings will revert to the factory default settings and
reboot the network capability.
Restart Printer Click Start to reboot the printer.
Administrator Password Sets the password using up to 10 alphanumeric characters. The password will appear as asterisks
(*) in the field when it is entered.
Re-enter Administrator
Password
Enter the password again to confirm.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 133
IP Filter (IPv4)
Purpose:
To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer.
Val u e s:
Print Volume
Use the Print Volume menu to verify the number of printed pages.
Val u es :
Address Book
The Address Book menu contains the Fax/E-Mail and Server Address pages.
Fax/E-Mail
The Fax/E-Mail page contains the following subpages.
Address Book - Top Page
Purpose:
To view the address book entries registered on the Address Book page.
Val u es :
Address Specifies the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value
between 0 and 255 in each field.
Address Mask Specifies the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric
value between 0 and 255 in each field.
Active Mode Permit Permits printing from specified network address.
Reject Rejects printing from specified network address.
Disable Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address.
Printer Page Count Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was shipped from the factory.
Paper Used Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.
Address Book Allows you to view, edit, or create address book entries.
Fax Group Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.
E-Mail Group Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.
E-Mail Default Setup Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.
Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user IDs indicated on the button.
ID:Name Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that user ID. IDs without an entry
show (Not in Use) in the Name column.
Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user.
E-Mail Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.
134 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:
To view or edit the address book entries on the Address Book page, or create a new entry. The following items are in
the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the Address Book top page.
Val u es :
Address Book (Delete)
Purpose:
To delete the address book entries registered on the Address Book page. The following items are in the dialog box
that appears when you click Delete on the Address Book top page.
Val u es :
Confirm/Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected user ID.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user ID.
ID (Fax Speed Dial) Displays the selected user ID.
Name Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the user ID, or enter a name for
the new entry.
Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the phone number of the user, or enter a phone number for the new
entry.
E-mail Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an e-mail address for the new
entry.
Delete Click this button to delete the entry for the user ID. This button is available only on the dialog
box for editing an existing entry.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.
ID (Fax Speed Dial) Displays the selected user ID.
Name Displays the name of the of the user registered under the selected user ID.
Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user.
E-mail Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 135
FAX Group - Top Page
Purpose:
To view the fax group entries registered on the Fax Group page.
Val u es :
FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:
To view or edit the fax number group entries on the Fax Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are
in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the Fax Group top page.
Val u es :
FAX Group (Delete)
Purpose:
To delete the fax number group entries registered on the Fax Group page. The following items are in the dialog box
that appears when you click Delete on the Fax Group top page.
Val u es :
GroupID:Name Displays a fax group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in
the Name column.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Confirm/Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.
Fax Group ID Displays the selected group ID.
Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or
enter a new group name.
FAX Speed Dial Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of
speed dial codes indicated on the button.
ID:Name Displays a speed dial code and the names of an entry registered
under the speed dial code. Speed dial codes without an entry show
(Not in Use) in the Name column.
Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered
under the selected speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the
new entry.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.
ID Displays the selected group ID.
Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.
136 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
E-Mail Group - Top Page
Purpose:
To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.
Val u es :
E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:
To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or create a new entry. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the E-Mail Group top page.
Val u es :
E-Mail Group (Delete)
Purpose:
To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The following items are in the dialog box
that appears when you click Delete on the E-mail Group top page.
Val u es :
GroupID:Name Displays a group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in the
Name column.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Confirm/Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.
E-Mail Group ID Displays the selected group ID.
Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or
enter a new group name.
E-Mail Address Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs
indicated on the button.
ID:Name Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that
user ID. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name
column.
Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an entry registered
under the selected user ID, or enter an e-mail address for the new
entry.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.
ID Displays the selected group ID.
Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 137
E-Mail Default Setup
Purpose:
To set the default e-mail subject and message.
Val u es :
Server Address
Server Address - Top Page
Purpose:
To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.
Val u es :
Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:
To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are
in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the Server Address top page.
Val u es :
Default Subject Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject. Up to 50 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Body Text Allows you to enter the default e-mail message. Up to 200 alphanumeric characters can be
entered.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button.
ID:Name Displays a server ID and the name of a file directory registered under that server ID. IDs without
an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.
Server Address Displays the address of the file directory.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.
Confirm/Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected server ID.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected server ID.
ID Displays the selected server ID.
Name Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server ID, or enter a new server
name.
Server Type FTP Select this to store scanned documents on a server via the FTP protocol.
SMB Select this to store scanned documents on a computer via the Server Message
Block (SMB) protocol.
Server Address Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the server ID, or enter a new server
address.
Share Name Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new shared name, when Server
Ty p e is set to SMB.
Server Path Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new path.
138 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Server Address (Delete)
Purpose:
To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The following items are in the dialog box
that appears when you click Delete on the Server Address top page.
Val u es :
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
Val u es :
Server Port Number Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter a new port number. If you
leave the text box blank, the default port number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.
Login Name Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter
a new login name.
Login Password Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a
new password.
Re-enter Password Enter the password again to confirm.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.
ID Displays the selected server ID.
Name Displays the name assigned for the server ID.
Server Address Displays the server address registered under the server ID.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.
MPF Paper Type Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Custom Size - Y Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Custom Size - X Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
Display Popup Sets whether to display a popup menu that prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size
when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 139
14
Understanding the Tool Box Menus
The Tool Box allows you to view or specify the system settings. You can also diagnose the system settings by using
the Tool Box.
The Tool Box consists of the Printer Settings Report, Printer Maintenance, and Diagnosis tabs.
NOTE: The Password dialog box appears the first time you try to change settings on Tool Box when Panel Lock is set on the
printer. In this case, enter the password you specified, and click OK to apply the settings.
Starting the Tool Box
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Tool Box
.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case,
click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click
OK.
The Tool Box opens.
Using the Tool Box to Change the Printer Settings
You can select menu items and corresponding values from the Tool Box.
To select a new value as a setting:
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Tool Box
.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and
then click OK.
The
Tool Box
opens.
2
Click the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
3
Select the desired menu item.
Each menu item has a list of values for the menu item. A value can be:
• A phrase or word to describe a setting
• A numerical value that can be changed
• An On or Off setting
4
Select the desired value, and then click the associated button with each menu item.
Driver settings may have precedence over changes previously made and may require you to change the
Tool Box
defaults.
140 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Printer Settings Report
The Printer Settings Report tab contains the Printer Information, Menu Settings, Reports, TCP/IP Settings, Tray
Settings, Defaults Settings, and Fax Settings pages.
Printer Information
Purpose:
To display the information of your printer.
Val u e s:
Menu Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of your printer.
Val u e s:
Dell Service Tag Number Displays the service tag number of your printer.
Express Service Code Displays the express service code of the printer.
Printer Serial Number Displays the serial number of the printer.
Printer Type Displays the type of the printer.
Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag of the printer.
Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity.
Processor Speed Displays the processing speed.
Firmware Version Displays the version of the controller.
Network Firmware Version Displays the Network Interface Card (NIC) version.
MCU Firmware Version Displays the version of the Machine Control Unit (MCU) firmware.
Printing Speed (Color) Displays the speed for color printing.
Printing Speed (Monochrome) Displays the speed for monochrome printing.
Boot Code Version Displays the boot code version.
Color Table Version Displays the color table version.
System Settings Sleep Displays the time taken by the printer before it enters
Sleep mode after it finishes a job.
Deep Sleep Displays the time taken by the printer before it enters
Deep Sleep mode after it goes into Sleep mode.
Auto Reset Displays the time taken by the printer before it
automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or Fax on
the operator panel to the defaults when no additional
settings are made.
Panel Select Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
operator panel input is correct. Off indicates that the tone
is disabled.
Panel Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
operator panel input is incorrect. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 141
Job Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job
is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a
problem occurs. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Out of Paper Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
printer runs out of paper. Off indicates that the tone is
disabled.
Auto Clear Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds
before the printer performs auto clear. Off indicates that
the tone is disabled.
All Tones Displays the volume of all the alert tones. Off indicates
that all the tones are disabled.
Job Time-Out Displays the amount of time that the printer waits for data
to arrive from the computer.
Fault Time-Out Displays the time taken by the printer before it cancels
jobs that stop abnormally.
Panel Language Displays the language used on the operator panel.
Auto Log Print Displays whether to automatically print a job history
report after every 20 jobs.
Disable printing with larger paper size Displays whether to disable printing if the paper size set in
the printer driver and the paper size set in the tray of the
printer does not match (the paper set in the tray is larger).
mm/inch Displays the measurement unit used after the numeric
value on the operator panel.
Date & Time Date Format Displays the default date format.
Time Format Displays the default time format; 24H or 12H.
Time Zone Displays the default time zone.
Set Date Displays the date setting.
Set Time Displays the time setting.
Paper Density Plain Displays the paper density of plain paper.
Label Displays the paper density of labels.
Adjust Transfer Roller Plain Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for plain
paper.
Plain Thick Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for thick
plain paper.
Recycled Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for
recycled paper.
Covers Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for cover
paper.
Coated Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for coated
paper.
Envelope Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for
envelopes.
Label Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for labels.
142 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Reports
Purpose:
To print the settings and history information of your printer.
The reports are printed in the paper size specified in system settings.
Val u e s:
Adjust Fusing Unit Plain Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
plain paper.
Plain Thick Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
thick plain paper.
Recycled Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
recycled paper.
Covers Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
cover paper.
Coated Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
coated paper.
Envelope Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
envelopes.
Label Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
labels.
Auto Registration
Adjustment
Displays whether to automatically adjust color
registration.
Adjust Altitude Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is
installed.
Non-Dell Toner Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another
manufacturer.
Transfer Roller Refresh
Mode
Displays whether to execute counter measures for
curling/separating discharge of the paper.
Web Link
Customization
Select Reorder URL Displays a link used for ordering consumables.
Regular Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx).
Premier Displays the premier web address
(http://premier.dell.com).
System Settings Click to print a detailed list of the system settings.
Panel Settings Click to print a detailed list of the panel settings.
Job History Click to print the completed jobs history.
Error History Click to print the error history.
Color Test Page Click to print the Color Test Page.
Address Book List Click to print the list of Personal Address, Fax Group, and E-mail Group stored as
Address Book.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 143
TCP/IP Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol.
Val u e s:
Tray Settings
Purpose:
To display the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
Val u e s:
IP Address Mode Displays the method for acquiring the IP address.
IP Address Displays the IP address of your printer.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
Gateway Address Displays the gateway address.
Paper Type Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.
Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.
Custom Size - Y Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
Custom Size - X Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
Display Popup Displays whether to use a popup menu that prompts the user to set Paper Type
and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
144 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Defaults Settings
Purpose:
To display the default scan, fax, and copy settings of the printer.
Val u e s:
Scan Defaults Scan To Network Displays whether to store scanned image on a network server or on a computer.
File Format Displays the file format to save the scanned image.
Color Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Resolution Displays the default scan resolution.
Document Size Displays the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default scan density level.
Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.
Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text
on the scanned image.
Margin Top/Bottom Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin Left/Right Displays the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.
TIFF File Format Displays the TIFF file format.
Image Compression Displays the image compression level.
Max E-Mail Size Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.
Fax Defaults Resolution Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.
Document Type Displays the type of document.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default density level to be used for fax transmission.
Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time.
Copy Defaults Color Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white.
Reduce/Enlarge Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Original Type Displays the default document type.
Document Size Displays the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default copy density level.
Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.
Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text
on the copy.
Color Balance (Red) Displays the color balance level of red.
Color Balance (Green) Displays the color balance level of green.
Color Balance (Blue) Displays the color balance level of blue.
Gray Balance Displays the gray balance level.
Multiple-Up Displays whether to enable the Multiple-Up feature.
Collated Displays whether to sort the copy job.
Margin Top/Bottom Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin Left/Right Displays the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 145
Fax Settings
Purpose:
To display the basic fax settings.
Val u e s:
Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode.
Auto Rec Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after
receiving an incoming call.
Auto Rec Fax/Tel Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Rec Ans/Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external answering machine receives an incoming call.
Line Monitor Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission
through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
Ring Tone Volume Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a
telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
Telephone/Fax.
Line Type Displays the line type.
Tone/Pulse Displays the dialing type.
Resend Delay Displays the interval between transmission attempts.
Redial Attempts Displays the number of redial attempts.
Redial Delay Displays the interval between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
Remote Receive Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code on the external
telephone.
Remote Rcv Tone Displays the remote receive code to start Remote Receive.
Fax Header Displays whether to print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Fax Header Name Displays the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Number Displays the fax number to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting.
Sent Fax Fwd Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Fax Fwd Number Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes are to be
forwarded.
Prefix Dial Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Num Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials before any auto dial number is
started.
Discard Size Displays whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the
entire page does not fit onto the output paper.
ECM Displays whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM).
Modem Speed Displays the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Fax Activity Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50
incoming and outgoing fax communications.
146 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab contains the System Settings, Date & Time, Paper Density, Adjust Transfer Roller,
Adjust Fusing Unit, Registration Adjustment, Adjust Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-Dell Toner, Transfer Roller
Refresh Mode, Web Link Customization, TCP/IP Settings, Tray Settings, EWS, Scan Defaults, Fax Defaults,
Copy Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.
System Settings
Purpose:
To configure the power saving mode, auto clear time, warning tones, time-out time, operator panel language
settings, job log auto print, and mm/inch setting.
Val u e s:
Fax Transmit Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only
when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to
multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Fax Protocol Displays whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or
only when an error occurs.
Country Displays the country where the printer is used.
Power Saver Timer Sleep*1 Available Range:
5– 30 minutes
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters Sleep
mode after it finishes a job.
Deep Sleep Available Range:
1–6 minutes
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters Deep
Sleep mode after it goes into Sleep mode.
Auto Reset 45 seconds Specifies the time taken by the printer before it automatically resets the settings for
Copy, Scan, or Fax on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional
settings are made.
1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
Alert Tone Panel Select
Tone
Off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel
input is correct.
Medium
High
Panel Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is
incorrect.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel
input is incorrect.
Medium
High
Job Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a job is complete.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job is complete.
Medium
High
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 147
Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when a problem occurs.
Medium
High
Out of Paper
Tone
Off Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer runs out
of paper.
Medium
High
Auto Clear Alert
Tone
Off Does not emit a tone before the printer performs auto clear.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 seconds before the
printer performs auto clear.
Medium
High
All Tones Off Disables all the alert tones.
Low Specifies the volume of all the alert tones at once.
Medium
High
Job Time-Out 0 Disables the job time-out.
Available Range:
5–300 seconds
Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the
computer. The print job is cancelled if it times out.
Fault Time-Out 0 Disables the fault time-out.
Available Range:
3–300 seconds
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it cancels jobs that stop abnormally.
The print job is cancelled if it times out.
Panel Language English Specifies the language to be used on the operator panel.
French
Italian
German
Spanish
Dutch
Danish
Norwegian
Swedish
Auto Log Print Off Does not automatically print a job history report.
On Automatically prints a job history report after every 20 jobs.
148 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Date & Time
Purpose:
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
Val u e s:
Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Val u e s:
Disable printing with
larger paper size*2 Off Prints even if the paper set in the tray of the printer is larger than the paper size set
in the printer driver (the paper size does not have to match).
On Disables printing if the paper size set in the printer driver differs from the paper set
in the tray of the printer (the paper set in the tray is larger).
mm/inch millimeter (mm) Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator
panel.
inch (")
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
*1 Enter 5 in Sleep to put the printer in the Sleep mode five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less energy, but requires more warm-
up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum
warm-up time. Select a value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance between energy
consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the Sleep mode when it receives data from the computer. You can also
return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
*2 Disable printing with larger paper size is available only in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool and the Tool Box.
Date Format Specifies the date format; yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yy, or dd/mm/yy.
Time Format Specifies the time format; 12H or 24H.
Time Zone Specifies the time zone.
Set Date Specifies the current date.
Set Time Specifies the current time.
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
Plain Light Specifies the paper density of plain paper.
Normal
Label Light Specifies the paper density of labels.
Normal
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 149
Adjust Transfer Roller
Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller. To decrease the voltage, set negative
values. To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to
increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Val u e s:
Adjust Fusing Unit
Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To decrease the temperature, set
negative values. To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to
decrease the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Val u e s:
Plain Available Range:
-3 – +3
Plain Thick Available Range:
-3 – +3
Recycled Available Range:
-3 – +3
Covers Available Range:
-3 – +3
Coated Available Range:
-3 – +3
Envelope Available Range:
-3 – +3
Label Available Range:
-3 – +3
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
Plain Available Range:
-3 – +3
Plain Thick Available Range:
-3 – +3
Recycled Available Range:
-3 – +3
Covers Available Range:
-3 – +3
Coated Available Range:
-3 – +3
150 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Registration Adjustment
Purpose:
To set Color Registration Adjustment (individual yellow, magenta, cyan correction) settings. When Auto
Registration Adjustment is set to On, the printer prints the color registration chart and adjusts the color registration
by using the chart. Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the
printer is moved to a different location.
Val u e s:
Envelope Available Range:
-3 – +3
Label Available Range:
-3 – +3
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
Auto Registration
Adjustment
Off Automatically adjusts color registration.
On Does not automatically adjust color registration.
Auto Correct*1 Click Start to automatically correct color registration.
Print Color Regi Chart*1,*2 Click Start to print a color registration chart.
Color Registration
Adjustment 1 (Lateral)*1 Yellow Available Range:
-5–+5
Specifies lateral (perpendicular to paper feed
direction) color adjustment values individually.
Magenta Available Range:
-5–+5
Cyan Available Range:
-5–+5
Color Registration
Adjustment 2 (Process)*1 LY(Left Yellow) Available Range:
-5–+5
Specifies process (paper feed direction) color
adjustment values individually.
LM(Left Magenta) Available Range:
-5–+5
LC(Left Cyan) Available Range:
-5–+5
RY(Right Yellow) Available Range:
-5–+5
RM(Right Magenta) Available Range:
-5–+5
RC(Right Cyan) Available Range:
-5–+5
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the
changes.
*1 This item is available only when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.
*2 The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and cyan lines. On the chart, find the values on the right side that
are next to the line that is perfectly straight for each of the three colors. If the value for this line is 0, color registration is not needed. If
the value for this line is any value other than 0, specify the adjustment values under Color Registration Adjustment.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 151
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are
performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner.
Val u e s:
Reset Defaults
Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for system parameters or Address Book data. After executing this function
and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to their default values.
For details, see "Resetting Defaults" on page 162.
Val u e s:
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
NOTE: Using non-Dell™-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features unusable, reduce print quality and decrease
the reliability of your printer. Dell recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide
warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart the printer.
Val u e s:
0 meter Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
1000 meters
2000 meters
3000 meters
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
System Section Click to initialize the system parameters.
User Fax Section Click to initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.
User Scan Section Click to initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.
Non-Dell Toner Off Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
On Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
152 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Transfer Roller Refresh Mode
Purpose:
To execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.
Val u e s:
Web Link Customization
Purpose:
To specify a link used for ordering consumables.
Val u e s:
TCP/IP Settings
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings.
Val u e s:
Transfer Roller
Refresh Mode
Off Does not automatically execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge
of the paper.
On Automatically executes counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the
paper.
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
Select Reorder URL Select the Regular or Premier URL.
Regular Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx).
Premier Displays the premier web address (http://premier.dell.com).
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
IP Address Mode AutoIP Automatically sets the IP address.
BOOTP Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.
RARP Uses RARP to set the IP address.
DHCP Uses DHCP to set the IP address.
Panel Manually sets the IP address.
IP Address Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.
Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask.
Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address.
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings Click Restart printer to apply new settings to apply the changes.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 153
Tray Settings
Purpose:
To specify the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
Val u e s:
Paper Type Plain Specifies the type of paper loaded in the MPF.
Plain Thick
Covers
Coated
Label
Recycled
Envelope
Plain - Side 2
Plain Thick - Side 2
Covers - Side 2
Coated - Side 2
Recycled - Side 2
Paper Size A4 Specifies the size of paper loaded in the MPF.
A5
B5
Letter
Folio
Legal
Executive
Envelope #10
Monarch
Monarch Landscape
DL
DL Landscape
C5
Custom Size
Custom Size - Y Available Range:
127–355 mm/
5.0–14.0 inch
Specifies the length of custom size paper.
Custom Size - X Available Range:
77–215 mm/3.0–8.5
inch
Specifies the width of custom size paper.
Display Popup On Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size
when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
Off Does not display a popup menu.
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
154 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
EWS (Embedded Web Server or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool)
Purpose:
To display the server settings of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
NOTE: When the printer is connected to the USB port, this setting cannot be displayed.
Val u e s:
Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Scan settings.
Val u e s:
Print Server Settings Click Display to display the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
Display of EWS On Turns on the display of the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
Off Turns off the display of the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings Click Restart printer to apply new settings to apply the changes.
Scan To Network Computer
(Network)
Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block (SMB)
protocol.
Server (FTP) Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.
File Format TIFF Saves the scanned image in TIFF.
PDF Saves the scanned image in PDF.
JPEG Saves the scanned image in JPEG.
Color Black & White Scans in black and white mode.
GrayScale Scan in grayscale mode.
Color Scans in color mode.
Color (Photo) Scans in color mode. This is suitable for photographic images.
Resolution 200 Scans an image at 200dpi.
300 Scans an image at 300dpi.
400 Scans an image at 400dpi.
600 Scans an image at 600dpi.
Document Size A4 Sets the document size to A4.
A5 Sets the document size to A5.
B5 Sets the document size to B5.
Letter Sets the document size to Letter.
Folio Sets the document size to Folio.
Legal Sets the document size to Legal.
Executive Sets the document size to Executive.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 155
Lighter/Darker Lighter2 Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.
Lighter1
Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1 Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with light print or
faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Sharpness Softest Makes the scanned image softer than the original.
Softer
Normal Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.
Sharper Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.
Sharpest
Auto Exposure On Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.
Off Does not suppress the background.
Margin Top/Bottom Available Range:
0–50 mm/0.0–2.0
inch
Specifies the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin Left/Right Available Range:
0–50 mm/0.0–2.0
inch
Specifies the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle Available Range:
0–50 mm/0.0–2.0
inch
Specifies the value of the middle margin.
TIFF File Format TIFF V6 Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6.
TTN2 Sets the TIFF file format to TTN2.
Image Compression High Sets the image compression level to High.
Medium Sets the image compression level to Medium.
Low Sets the image compression level to Low.
Max E-Mail Size Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of 50 K bytes
to 16384 K bytes.
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
156 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Fax settings.
Val u e s:
Resolution Standard Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is
enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution.
Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
Document Type Text Improves the image quality of documents with text.
Photo Improves the image quality of documents with photos.
Lighter/Darker Lighter2 Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.
Lighter1
Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1 Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil
markings.
Darker2
Delayed Start Available Range:
00:00–23:59
Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 157
Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Copy settings.
Val u e s:
Color Black & White Prints in black and white mode.
Color Prints in color mode.
Reduce/Enlarge mm series 200% Sets the default enlargement ratio when you set
the default measurement unit to millimeter.
A5->A4 (141%)
A5->B5 (122%)
100% Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied
image.
B5->A5 (81%) Sets the default reduction ratio when you set
the default measurement unit to millimeter.
A4->A5 (70%)
50%
Custom Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio to
the custom size.
inch series 200% Sets the default enlargement ratio when you set
the default measurement unit to inch.
Statement->Legal (154%)
Statement->Letter (129%)
100% Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied
image.
Legal->Letter (78%) Sets the default reduction ratio when you set
the default measurement unit to inch.
Ledger->
Letter (64%)
50%
Custom Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio to
the custom size.
Custom Reduce/Enlarge Available Range:
25–400%
Reduces or enlarges the image to the custom
size when Reduce/Enlarge is set to Custom.
Original Type Text Suitable for documents with text.
Text & Photo Suitable for documents with both text and
photos/gray tones.
Photo Suitable for documents with photos.
Document Size A4 Sets the document size to A4.
A5 Sets the document size to A5.
B5 Sets the document size to B5.
Letter Sets the document size to Letter.
Folio Sets the document size to Folio.
Legal Sets the document size to Legal.
Executive Sets the document size to Executive.
158 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Lighter/Darker Lighter2 Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works
well with dark print.
Lighter1
Normal Works well with standard typed or printed
documents.
Darker1 Makes the copy darker than the original. Works
well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Sharpness Softest Makes the copy softer than the original.
Softer
Normal Does not make the copy sharper or softer than
the original.
Sharper Makes the copy sharper than the original.
Sharpest
Auto Exposure On Suppresses the background of the original to
enhance text on the copy.
Off Does not suppress the background.
Color Balance (Red) Available Range:
-2– 2
Sets the color balance level of red.
Color Balance (Green) Available Range:
-2– 2
Sets the color balance level of green.
Color Balance (Blue) Available Range:
-2– 2
Sets the color balance level of blue.
Gray Balance Available Range:
-2– 2
Sets the gray balance level.
Multiple-Up Off Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit
onto one sheet of paper.
ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper
in the original size.
Manual Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of
paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.
Collated Uncollated Does not sort the copy job.
Collated Sorts the copy job.
Auto Automatically determines which output mode
for the copy job.
Margin Top/Bottom Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0
inch
Specifies the value of the top and bottom
margins.
Margin Left/Right Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0
inch
Specifies the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0
inch
Specifies the value of the middle margin.
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply
New Settings to apply the changes.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 159
Fax Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic fax settings.
Val u e s:
Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the
handset of the external telephone, and then pressing the remote receive code.
Fax Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone/Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the
time specified in Auto Rec Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically receives a
fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker
indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Ans Machine/Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode,
the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If
the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country (such as
Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), this
mode is not supported.
DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive
ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company.
After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a
distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring
pattern.
Auto Rec Fax Available Range:
0–255 seconds
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving
an incoming call.
Auto Rec Fax/Tel Available Range:
0–255 seconds
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Rec Ans/Fax Available Range:
0–255 seconds
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external answering machine receives an incoming call.
Line Monitor Off Turns off the volume of the line monitor.
Low Specifies the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission
through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
Medium
High
Ring Tone Volume Off Turns off the volume of the ring tone.
Low Specifies the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a
telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
Telephone/Fax.
Medium
High
Line Type PSTN Sets the line type to PSTN.
PBX Sets the line type to PBX.
Tone/Pulse Tone Sets the dialing type to Tone.
Pulse(10PPS) Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10 pulse per second).
Resend Delay Available Range:
3–255 seconds
Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.
Redial Attempts Available Range:
0–9
Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number
is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial.
Redial Delay Available Range:
1–15 minutes
Specifies the interval between redial attempts.
160 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
Junk Fax Setup Off Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax
numbers registered in the Phone Book.
Remote Receive Off Disables the remote receive feature.
On Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after
picking up the handset of the telephone.
Remote Rcv Tone Available Range:
00–99
Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.
Fax Header On Prints the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Off Does not print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Fax Header Name Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30
alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page Off Does not attach a cover page to faxes.
On Attaches a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern Pattern1–7 Provides a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
Sent Fax Fwd Off Does not forward incoming faxes.
Forward Always forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Print and Forward Always forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination and prints all forwarded
incoming faxes.
Fax Fwd Number Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be
forwarded.
Prefix Dial Off Does not set a prefix dial number.
On Sets a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Num Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto
dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch
Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size Off Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.
On Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.
Auto Reduction Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the output paper.
ECM On Enables the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the
ECM.
Off Disables the ECM.
Modem Speed 2.4 Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
4.8
9.6
14.4
33.6
Fax Activity Auto Print Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.
No Auto Print Does not automatically print a fax activity report.
Fax Transmit Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.
Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 161
Diagnosis
The Diagnosis tab contains the Chart Print, Environment Sensor Info, Clean Developer, and Refresh Mode pages.
Chart Print
Purpose:
To print various charts that can be used for diagnosing your printer.
Val u e s:
Environment Sensor Info
Purpose:
To output the internal environment sensor information of the printer to Result by clicking Get Environment Sensor
Info.
Clean Developer
Purpose:
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.
Val u e s:
Refresh Mode
Purpose:
Fax Broadcast Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple
destinations.
Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations.
Fax Protocol Print Disable Does not print a protocol monitor report.
Print On Error Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.
Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.
Country Selects the country where the printer is used.
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings Click Restart printer to apply new settings to apply the changes.
Pitch Configuration Chart Click to print full halftone pages for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Also outputs
pages to check the pitch.
Ghost Configuration Chart Click to print a chart to check for ghost printing.
4 Colors Configuration Chart Click to print bands of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black with varying density.
MQ Chart Click to print charts to check for the binding.
Alignment Chart Click to print a chart, and then check for proper alignment of the print image on
the paper.
Drum Refresh Configuration Chart Click to print a chart to check the light fatigue of the drum unit.
Clean Developer Click Start to stir the toner.
162 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life, or to stir the toner in a new toner
cartridge.
NOTE: Using the Refresh Mode consumes extra toner.
Val u e s:
Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to their default values.
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Tool Box
.
NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the Select Printer window appears. In this case, click
Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click
OK.
The
Tool Box
opens.
2
Click the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
3
Select
Reset Defaults
from the list at the left side of the page.
The
Reset Defaults
page is displayed.
4
Select the desired option button.
The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.
Toner Refresh Mode Yellow Click to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.
Magenta Click to clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.
Cyan Click to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.
Black Click to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.
Understanding the Printer Menus 163
15
Understanding the Printer Menus
When your printer is configured as a network printer available to a number of users, the access to the Admin Menu
menus can be limited. This prevents unauthorized users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change the
default menu settings that has been set by the administrator. However, you can use select settings for individual
print jobs using the printer driver. Print settings selected from the printer driver have precedence over the default
menu settings selected from the operator panel.
Defaults Settings
Use the Defaults Settings menu to configure the default copy, scan, and fax settings of the printer.
Copy Defaults
Use the Copy Defaults menus to configure a variety of copy features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Color
Purpose:
To set whether to make copies in color or in black and white.
Val u e s:
Collated
Purpose:
To sort the copy job.
Val u e s:
Black & White Prints in black and white mode.
Color* Prints in color mode.
Uncollated* Does not sort the copy job.
Collated Sorts the copy job.
Auto Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job.
164 Understanding the Printer Menus
Reduce/Enlarge
Purpose:
To set the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Val u e s:
mm series
inch series
NOTE: You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25% to 400%, or press to enlarge the zoom
ratio or press to reduce the zoom ratio in 1% intervals.
NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or Manual.
200%
A5->A4(141%)
A5->B5(122%)
100%*
B5->A5(81%)
A4->A5(70%)
50%
200%
Stmt->Lgl(154%)
Stmt->Ltr(129%)
100%*
Lgl->Ltr (78%)
Ldgr->Ltr(64%)
50%
Understanding the Printer Menus 165
Document Size
Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Val u e s:
Original Type
Purpose:
To select the copy image quality.
Val u e s:
Lighter/Darker
Purpose:
To set the default copy density level.
Val u e s:
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
*1 The default for
Document Size varies
depending on country-specific
factory default.
Text Suitable for documents with text.
Text & Photo* Suitable for documents with both text and photos/gray tones.
Photo Suitable for documents with photos.
Lighter2 Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.
Lighter1
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1 Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
166 Understanding the Printer Menus
Sharpness
Purpose:
To set the default sharpness level.
Val u e s:
Auto Exposure
Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Val u e s:
Color Balance R
Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of red within the range of -2 to +2.
Color Balance G
Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of green within the range of -2 to +2.
Color Balance B
Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of blue within the range of -2 to +2.
Gray Balance
Purpose:
To specify the default gray balance level within the range of -2 to +2.
Sharpest Makes the copy sharper than the original.
Sharper
Normal* Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Softer Makes the copy softer than the original.
Softest
Off Does not suppress the background.
On* Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Understanding the Printer Menus 167
Multiple-Up
Purpose:
To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Val u e s:
Margin Top/Bottom
Purpose:
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.
Val u e s:
Margin Left/Right
Purpose:
To specify the value of the left and right margins.
Val u e s:
Margin Middle
Purpose:
To specify the value of the middle margin.
Val u e s:
Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.
Manual Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.
4 mm*/0.2 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
4 mm*/0.2 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
0 mm*/0.0 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
168 Understanding the Printer Menus
Scan Defaults
Use the Scan Defaults menus to configure a variety of scanner features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Scan to Network
Purpose:
To store the scanned image on a network server or on a computer.
Val u e s:
File Format
Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Val u e s:
Color
Purpose:
To set whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Val u e s:
Color Button Set
Purpose:
To assign color mode to the color mode switch button.
Values:
Computer(Network)* Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Server(FTP) Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.
PDF*
TIFF
JPEG
Black & White Scans in black and white mode.
Color* Scans in color mode.
B&W Button Black & White* Scans in black and white when Black & White is selected for a color mode.
Grayscale Scans in gray scale when Black & White is selected for a color mode.
Color Button Color* Scans in color when Color is selected for a color mode.
Color(Photo) Scans in color (Photo) when Color is selected for a color mode. This is suitable
for photographic images.
Understanding the Printer Menus 169
Resolution
Purpose:
To specify the default scan resolution.
Val u e s:
Document Size
Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Val u e s:
Lighter/Darker
Purpose:
To set the default scan density level.
Val u e s:
200 x 200dpi*
300 x 300dpi
400 x 400dpi
600 x 600dpi
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
*1 The default for
Document Size varies
depending on country-specific
factory default.
Lighter2 Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.
Lighter1
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1 Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
170 Understanding the Printer Menus
Sharpness
Purpose:
To set the default sharpness level.
Val u e s:
Auto Exposure
Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.
Val u e s:
Margin Top/Bottom
Purpose:
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.
Val u e s:
Margin Left/Right
Purpose:
To specify the value of the left and right margins.
Val u e s:
Sharpest Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.
Sharper
Normal* Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.
Softer Makes the scanned image softer than the original.
Softest
Off Does not suppress the background.
On* Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.
2 mm*/0.1 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
2 mm*/0.1 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
Understanding the Printer Menus 171
Margin Middle
Purpose:
To specify the value of the middle margin.
Val u e s:
TIFF File Format
Purpose:
To specify the default TIFF file format.
Val u e s:
Image Compression
Purpose:
To specify the image compression level.
Val u e s:
Max E-Mail Size
Purpose:
To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The default
is 2048 K bytes.
0 mm*/0.0 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
TIFF V6*Sets the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6.
TTN2 Sets the default Tiff file format to TTN2.
High Sets the image compression level to High.
Medium* Sets the image compression level to Medium.
Low Sets the image compression level to Low.
172 Understanding the Printer Menus
Fax Defaults
Use the Fax Defaults menus to configure a variety of fax features.
NOTE: The FAX service cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country. If Country is not set up, a
message Set The Country Code appears on the display.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Resolution
Purpose:
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.
Val u e s:
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.
Original Type
Purpose:
To select the default document type.
Val u e s:
Lighter/Darker
Purpose:
To set the default copy density level.
Val u e s:
Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix
printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The Super Fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports the super fine resolution. See the notes below.
Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
Text* Suitable for documents with text.
Photo Suitable for documents with photos.
Lighter2 Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.
Lighter1
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1 Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Understanding the Printer Menus 173
Delayed Start
Purpose:
This feature enables you to set a specific time for the fax transmission to start. Once Delayed Start mode is
activated, your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time.
After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.
Val u e s:
NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in this printer.
Print from USB Defaults
Layout
Purpose:
To automatically enlarge print documents when you print directly from a USB storage device.
Val u e s:
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
MPF
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the MPF.
Val u e s:
21:00*/PM9:00* Specify the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.
0:00 - 23:59 /
AM/PM1:00 - 12:59
Auto* Automatically enlarges print documents to fit on the paper.
Off Does not enlarge print documents.
Paper Size A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
Envelope #10 (4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env. (3.9x7.5")
Monarch Env. L (7.5x3.9")
174 Understanding the Printer Menus
NOTE: For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 208.
Report / List
Use the Report / List menu to print various types of reports and lists.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Report / List menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this
case, enter the password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
System Settings
Purpose:
To print a list of the information such as the printer name, service tag, the status of the printer, consumables, and
the network settings.
Panel Settings
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus.
DL Env. (110x220 mm)
DL Env. L (220x110 mm)
C5 Envelope (162 x 229 mm)
Custom Size Portrait(Y) 297mm*/11.7inch*Specifies the length of the custom size
paper.
Available Range:
127-355 mm/5.0-14.0 inches
Landscape(X) 210mm*/8.3inch*Specifies the width of the custom size
paper.
Available Range:
77-215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches
Paper Type Plain*
Plain Thick
Covers
Coated
Label
Recycled
Envelope
Plain S2
Plain Thick S2
Covers S2
Coated S2
Recycled S2
Display Popup Off Does not display a popup menu.
On* Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to set Paper Size and Paper Type
when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
*1 The default for Paper Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.
Understanding the Printer Menus 175
Job History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.
Error History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.
Color Test Page
Purpose:
To print a page for testing colors.
Protocol Monitor
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.
Address Book
Purpose:
To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.
Fax Activity
Purpose:
To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.
Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Report / List
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until the desired report or list is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
The selected report or list is printed.
Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Tool Box
.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and
then click OK.
The
Tool Box
opens.
2
Click the
Printer Settings Report
tab.
3
Select
Reports
from the list at the left side of the page.
The
Reports
page is displayed.
4
Click the button for the desired report or list.
The report or list is printed.
176 Understanding the Printer Menus
Admin Menu
Use the Admin Menu menu to configure a variety of printer features.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
Phone Book
Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.
Speed Dial
Purpose:
To store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.
See also:
"Storing a Number for Speed Dialing" on page 282.
Group Dial
Purpose:
To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial code. Up to 6 group dial codes can be
registered.
See also:
"Setting Group Dial" on page 283.
Network
Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the wired or
wireless network.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Ethernet
Purpose:
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change takes effect after the printer is
turned off and then on.
Val u e s:
NOTE: For Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer, this item is not displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and
Wi-Fi is set to On.
Auto* Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.
10BASE-T Half Uses 10base-T half-duplex.
10BASE-T Full Uses 10base-T full-duplex.
100BASE-TX Half Uses 100base-TX half-duplex.
100BASE-TX Full Uses 100base-TX full-duplex.
Understanding the Printer Menus 177
Wireless Status (Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
Purpose:
To display the information on the wireless signal strength. No changes can be made on the operator panel to improve
the status of the wireless connection.
Val u e s:
NOTE: This item is displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi-Fi is set to On.
Wireless Setup (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
Purpose:
To configure the wireless network interface.
Val u e s:
Connection Good Indicates good signal strength.
Acceptable Indicates marginal signal strength.
Low Indicates insufficient signal strength.
No Reception Indicates that no signal is received.
SSID Displays the name that identifies the wireless network.
Encryption Type Displays the encryption type.
Select Access Select the access point from the list.
WEP Key Entry When you select an access point using WEP as the security method,
enter the WEP key. For 64bit keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can
be entered. For 128bit keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be
entered.
PassPhrase Entry When you select an access point using WPA, WPA2, or Mixed as the
encryption type, enter the passphrase of 8 to 63 alphanumeric
characters.
Manual Setup Enter Network
(SSID)
Specify a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters can be entered.
Infrastructure Select when you configure the wireless setting through the access point
such as a wireless router.
No Security*Specify No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying
a security method from WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, and WPA2-PSK-AES.
Mixed mode PSK Select to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type of
Mixed mode PSK. Mixed mode PSK automatically selects the
encryption type from either WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA-PSK-AES, or
WPA2-PSK-AES.
PassPhrase
Entry
Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters
from 8 to 63.
WPA-PSK-TKIP Select to configure the wireless setting with the security method of
WPA-PSK-TKIP.
PassPhrase
Entry
Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric characters
from 8 to 63.
178 Understanding the Printer Menus
NOTE: This item is displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi-Fi is set to On.
WPS (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
Purpose:
To configure the wireless network using WPS.
Val u e s:
NOTE: WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK
AES, WPA2-PSK AES, WPA-PSK TKIP, Open (No Security)
NOTE: This item is displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi-Fi is set to On.
WPA2-PSK-AES Select to configure the wireless setting with the security method of
WPA2-PSK-AES or WPA-PSK-AES.
PassPhrase
Entry
Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric characters
from 8 to 63.
WEP Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For 64bit
keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For 128bit keys,
up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1*, WEP
Key 2, WEP Key 3, and WEP Key 4.
Ad-hoc Select to configure the wireless setting without the access point such as
a wireless router.
No Security*Specify No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying
the security method from WEP.
WEP Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For 64bit
keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For 128bit keys,
up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1*, WEP
Key 2, WEP Key 3, and WEP Key 4.
Push Button Control PBC Start*1 No* Disables the security method of WPS-PBC.
Yes Configures the wireless setting with the security method of
WPS-PBC.
PIN Code Start Configuration Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned
automatically by the printer.
Print PIN Code Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when you enter the PIN code to
your computer.
*1 You can also start WPS-PBC by pressing and holding the (Wi-Fi | WPS) button.
Understanding the Printer Menus 179
Reset Wireless (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
Purpose:
To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wireless network
settings are reset to their default values.
NOTE: This item is displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi-Fi is set to On.
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings. The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on.
Val u e s:
Protocol
Purpose:
To enable or disable each protocol. The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on.
Val u e s:
No* Does not reset the wireless setting.
Yes Resets the wireless setting.
IP Mode Dual Stack* Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
IPv4 Mode Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.
IPv4 Get IP Address AutoIP* Automatically sets the IP address.
BOOTP Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.
RARP Uses RARP to set the IP address.
DHCP Uses DHCP to set the IP address.
Panel Enables the IP address entered on the operator panel.
IP Address Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.
Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask.
Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address.
LPD Disable Disables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.
Enable* Enables the LPD port.
Port9100 Disable Disables the Port9100 port.
Enable* Enables the Port9100 port.
WSD Disable Disables the Web Services on Devices (WSD) port.
Enable* Enables the WSD port.
SNMP Disable Disables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) UDP port.
Enable* Enables the SNMP UDP port.
E-Mail Alert Disable Disables the E-Mail Alert feature.
Enable* Enables the E-Mail Alert feature.
180 Understanding the Printer Menus
IP Filter
Purpose:
To block data received from certain IP addresses through the wired or wireless network. You can set up to five IP
addresses. The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on.
Val u e s:
NOTE: This item is only available for LPD or Port9100.
Initialize NVM
Purpose:
To initialize network data stored in NVM (non-volatile memory). After executing this function and rebooting the
printer, all network settings are reset to their default values.
Val u e s:
Wi-Fi (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
Purpose:
To enable the wireless connection.
Val u e s:
NOTE: This item is displayed only when the Ethernet cable is disconnected.
NOTE: When you use the USB connection and do not use the wireless connection, you need to disable the wireless LAN.
EWS Disable Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.
Enable* Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.
Bonjour(mDNS) Disable Disables the Bonjour (mDNS).
Enable* Enables the Bonjour (mDNS).
No. n/Address
(n is 1-5.)
Sets the IP address for Filter
n
.
No. n/Mask
(n is 1-5.)
Sets the address mask for Filter
n
.
No. n/Mode
(n is 1-5.)
Reject Rejects an access from the specified IP address.
Accept Accepts an access from the specified IP address.
Off* Disables the feature for Filter
n
.
Yes Initializes network data stored in NVM.
No* Does not initialize network data stored in NVM.
Off Disables the wireless connection.
On* Enables the wireless connection.
Understanding the Printer Menus 181
Fax Settings
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Receive Mode
Purpose:
To select the default fax receiving mode.
Val u e s:
Auto Rec Fax
Purpose:
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call. The interval
can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 0 second.
Auto Rec TEL/FAX
Purpose:
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an
incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 6 seconds.
Auto Rec Ans/FAX
Purpose:
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives
an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 21 seconds.
Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the
external telephone, and then pressing the remote receive code.
FAX* Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone/Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in
Auto Rec TEL/FAX, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is
not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Ans Machine/Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication is
using serial transmission in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium,
Italy, France and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.
DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service
must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company
has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup
to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
182 Understanding the Printer Menus
Line Monitor
Purpose:
To set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a
connection is made.
Val u e s:
Ring Tone Volume
Purpose:
To set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal
speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Val u e s:
Line Type
Purpose:
To select the line type.
Val u e s:
Tone/Pulse
Purpose:
To select the dialing type.
Val u e s:
Off Turns off the volume of the line monitor.
Low Sets the volume of the line monitor.
Medium*
High
Off Turns off the volume of the ring tone.
Low Sets the volume of the ring tone.
Medium
High*
PSTN* Sets the line type to PSTN.
PBX Sets the line type to PBX.
Tone* Sets the dialing type to Tone.
Pulse (10pps) Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10 pulse per second).
Understanding the Printer Menus 183
Resend Delay
Purpose:
To specify the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to 255 seconds. The default is 8 seconds.
Redial Attempts
Purpose:
To specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy, within the range of 0 to
9. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial. The default is 3.
Redial Delay
Purpose:
To specify the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15 minutes. The default is 1 minute.
Junk Fax Setup
Purpose:
To reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone
Book.
Val u e s:
NOTE: Ensure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup.
Remote Receive
Purpose:
To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the
telephone.
Val u e s:
Remote Rcv Tone
Purpose:
To specify the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.
Off* Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
Off* Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
On Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
184 Understanding the Printer Menus
Fax Header
Purpose:
To print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Val u e s:
Fax Header Name
Purpose:
To set the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Fax Number
Purpose:
To set the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page
Purpose:
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Val u e s:
Off Does not print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
On* Prints the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Off* Does not attach a cover page to faxes.
On Attaches a cover page to faxes.
Understanding the Printer Menus 185
DRPD Pattern
Purpose:
To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
Val u e s:
Forward Settings
Purpose:
To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Val u e s:
Pattern1-7 DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by your
telephone company. The patterns provided with your printer are shown below:
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service. For example, Pattern 7 is
the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400ms, stops for 800ms, rings for 400ms
and stops for 1400ms. This pattern is repeated over and over again. This printer only responds to
Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.
Off* Does not forward incoming faxes.
Forward Only Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Print and Forward Prints the incoming fax and forwards it to a specified destination.
Pattern1
Pattern2
Pattern3
Pattern4
Pattern5
Pattern6
Pattern7
186 Understanding the Printer Menus
Fax Fwd Number
Purpose:
To enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Prefix Dial
Purpose:
To select whether to set a prefix dial number.
Val u e s:
Prefix Dial Num
Purpose:
To set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful
for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size
Purpose:
To set whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the
output paper.
Val u e s:
ECM
Purpose:
To set whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines must also
support the ECM.
Val u e s:
Off* Does not set a prefix dial number.
On Sets a prefix dial number.
Off Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.
On Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.
Auto Reduction* Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the output paper.
Off Disable the ECM.
On* Enables the ECM.
Understanding the Printer Menus 187
Modem Speed
Purpose:
To specify the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Val u e s:
Fax Activity
Purpose:
To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Val u e s:
Fax Transmit
Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
Val u e s:
Fax Broadcast
Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an
error occurs.
Val u e s:
2.4 Kbps
4.8 Kbps
9.6 Kbps
14.4 Kbps
33.6 Kbps*
Auto Print* Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
No Auto Print Does not automatically print a fax activity report.
Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error* Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.
Print Always* Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.
188 Understanding the Printer Menus
Protocol Monitor
Purpose:
To set whether to print a protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of a communication problem.
Val u e s:
Country
Purpose:
To select the country where the printer is used.
System Settings
Use the System Settings menu to configure a variety of printer features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Power Saving Timer
Purpose:
To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.
Val u e s:
Enter 5 in Sleep to put the printer in the power saver timer mode five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less
energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room
lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate
with minimum warm-up time. Select a value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want
a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer mode when it receives data from
the computer. You can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable* Does not print a protocol monitor report after a fax transmission.
Sleep 5min* Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters Sleep mode after it finishes a
job.
Available Range:
5–30min
Deep Sleep 6min* Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters Deep Sleep mode after it goes
into Sleep mode.
Available Range:
1–6min
Understanding the Printer Menus 189
Auto Reset
Purpose:
To automatically reset the settings for COPY, SCAN, or FAX to the defaults and return to the standby mode after you
do not specify any settings for the specified time.
Val u e s:
Fault Time-Out
Purpose:
To specify the time taken by the printer before it cancels jobs that stop abnormally. The print job is cancelled if it
times out.
Val u e s:
Job Time-Out
Purpose:
To specify the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print job is cancelled
if it times out.
Val u e s:
45sec*
1min
2min
3min
4min
Off Disables the fault time-out.
On* 60sec* Specifies the time taken by the printer before it cancels for jobs that stop abnormally.
Available Range:
3–300sec
Off Disables the job time-out.
On* 30sec* Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.
Available Range:
5–300sec
190 Understanding the Printer Menus
Date & Time
Purpose:
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
Val u e s:
Alert Tone
Purpose:
To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears.
Val u e s:
Set Date Specifies the current date.
Set Time Specifies the current time.
Date Format*1 yy/mm/dd Specifies the date format.
mm/dd/yy
dd/mm/yy
Time Format 12H* Specifies the time format.
24H
Time Zone Specifies the time zone.
*1 The default for Date Format varies depending on country-specific factory default.
Panel Select Tone Off* Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel input is correct.
Medium
High
Panel Alert Tone Off* Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel input is incorrect.
Medium
High
Auto Clear Alert Off* Does not emit a tone before the printer performs auto clear.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.
Medium
High
Job Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a job is complete.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job is complete.
Medium*
High
Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when a problem occurs.
Medium*
High
Understanding the Printer Menus 191
mm / inch
Purpose:
To specify the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.
Val u e s:
NOTE: The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory default.
Auto Log Print
Purpose:
To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.
Val u e s:
NOTE: The job history report can also be printed using the Report List menu.
Low Toner Alert Msg
Purpose:
To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.
Val u e s:
Out of Paper Off Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer runs out of paper.
Medium*
High
All Tones Off Disables all the alert tones.
Low Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.
Medium*
High
Millimeters (mm) Specifies the default measurement unit.
Inches (")
Off* Does not automatically print a job history report.
On Automatically prints a job history report.
Off Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.
On* Shows the alert message when the toner is low.
192 Understanding the Printer Menus
Power On Wizard
Purpose:
To perform initial setup for the printer.
Val u e s:
Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to initialize NVM (non-volatile memory), configure the plain paper quality
adjustment settings, and configure the security settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
F/W Version
Purpose:
To display the version of the controller.
Service Tag
Purpose:
To display the service tag of the printer.
Express Code
Purpose:
To display the express service code of the printer.
Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Val u e s:
Yes Performs the initial setup for the printer.
No* Does not perform the initial setup for the printer.
Plain Light
Normal*
Label Light
Normal*
Understanding the Printer Menus 193
Adjust Transfer Roller
Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller. To decrease the voltage, set negative
values. To increase the voltage, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to
increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Val u e s:
Adjust Fusing Unit
Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To decrease the temperature, set
negative values. To increase the temperature, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to
decrease the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Val u e s:
Plain 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Plain Thick 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Covers 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Coated 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Label 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Recycled 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Envelope 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Plain 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Plain Thick 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Covers 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Coated 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
194 Understanding the Printer Menus
Auto Regi Adjust
Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Val u e s:
Adjust ColorRegi
Purpose:
To automatically adjust color registration.
Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to
a different location.
NOTE: This item is available only when Auto Regi Adjust is set to Off.
Val u e s:
Clean Developer
Purpose:
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.
Val u e s:
Label 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Recycled 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Envelope 0*
Available Range: -3 – +3
Off Does not automatically adjust color registration.
On* Automatically adjusts color registration.
Auto Adjust Yes Automatically adjusts color registration.
No* Does not automatically adjust color registration.
Yes Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge.
No* Does not stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
Understanding the Printer Menus 195
Toner Refresh
Purpose:
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life, or to stir the toner in a new toner
cartridge.
Val u e s:
Transfer Roller Refresh
Purpose:
Specify whether to execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.
Val u e s:
Initialize NVM
Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for system parameters, Address Book data for fax, or Address Book data for
e-mail. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to their default
values.
For details, see "Resetting Defaults" on page 201.
Val u e s:
Yellow Yes Cleans the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.
No* Does not clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.
Magenta Yes Cleans the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.
No* Does not clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.
Cyan Yes Cleans the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.
No* Does not clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.
Black Yes Cleans the toner in the black toner cartridge.
No* Does not clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.
Off*Does not automatically execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.
On Automatically executes counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.
User Fax Section Yes Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.
No* Does not initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.
User Scan Section Yes Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.
No* Does not initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.
System Section Yes Initializes the system parameters.
No* Does not initialize the system parameters.
196 Understanding the Printer Menus
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the
reliability of your printer. Dell recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty
coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart the printer.
Val u e s:
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are
performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner.
Val u e s:
Off* Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
On Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
0m* Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
1000m
2000m
3000m
Understanding the Printer Menus 197
Secure Settings
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This prevents items from being
changed accidentally.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Panel Lock
Purpose:
To restrict access to Admin Menu and Report / List.
For details see "Panel Lock Function" on page 200.
NOTE: You can select Disable for Panel Lock Set when all items under Function Enabled are set to On and
Secure Receive Set is set to Disable.
Val u e s:
Function Enabled
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable each of the printer services or to require a password to use the services, and to set or
change the password.
NOTE: You can access to the items under Function Enabled only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
Val u e s:
Panel Lock Set Disable* Does not restrict access to Admin Menu and Report / List.
Enable Restricts access to Admin Menu and Report / List with a password.
Change Password Available Range:
0000–9999
Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Menu and
Report / List.
COPY On* Enables the Copy service.
Off Disables the Copy service.
On(Password) Enables the Copy service, but requires a password.
On(Color Password) Enables the Copy service with a color mode, but requires a password.
FAX On* Enables the Fax service.
Off Disables the Fax service (the printer will not send or receive faxes).
On(Password) Enables the Fax services, but requires a password to send faxes (does not require
a password to receive incoming faxes).
SCAN On* Enables the Scan service.
Off Disables the Scan service.
On(Password) Enables the Scan service, but requires a password.
USB-Print On* Enables the USB-Print service.
Off Disables the USB-Print service.
On(Password) Enables the USB-Print service, but requires a password.
On(Color Password) Enables the USB-Print service with a color mode, but requires a password.
Change Password Sets or changes the password required to use the Copy, Scan, Fax, and
USB-Print services.
198 Understanding the Printer Menus
Secure Receive
Purpose:
To specify whether to require a password to print incoming faxes, and to set or change the password. When Secure
Receive Set is set to Enable, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is
entered on the operator panel.
NOTE: You can access to the items under Secure Receive Set only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
Val u e s:
Software Download
Purpose:
To enable or disable download of firmware updates.
Val u e s:
Scan to E-Mail
Use the Scan to E-Mail menu to edit the transmission source.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Edit From Field
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E-mail.
Val u e s:
Secure Receive Set Disable* Does not require a password to print incoming faxes.
Enable Requires a password to print incoming faxes.
Change Password Available Range:
0000–9999
Sets or changes the password required to print incoming faxes.
Disable Disables firmware updates.
Enable*Enables firmware updates.
Disable Disables editing of the transmission source.
Enable* Enables editing of the transmission source.
Understanding the Printer Menus 199
USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
USB port
Purpose:
To enable or disable the USB interface. The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on.
Val u e s:
Panel Language
Purpose:
To specify the language to be used on the operator panel.
Val u e s:
Enable* Enables the USB interface.
Disable Disables the USB interface.
English*
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Nederlands
Dansk
Norsk
Svenska
200 Understanding the Printer Menus
Panel Lock Function
This feature prevents unauthorized users from changing settings made by the administrator. However, you can select
settings for individual print jobs using the printer driver.
Enabling the Panel Lock
1
Press the (
Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Secure Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Ensure that
Panel Lock
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Ensure that
Panel Lock Set
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Press the button until
Enable
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: The factory-default panel password is 0000.
NOTE: Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below allows you to reset the password, but the
settings for Address Book and Phone Book are cleared.
•Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the (Menu) button, turn on the printer.
NOTE: If you change the password while Panel Lock is Enable, perform steps 1 to 5. Press the
button until
Change Password is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button. Enter the new password, and then press the
(Set) button. This will change the password.
Disabling the Panel Lock
1
Press the (
Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Enter the password, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Secure Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Ensure that
Panel Lock
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Ensure that
Panel Lock Set
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
8
Press the button until
Disable
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
Understanding the Printer Menus 201
Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to their default values.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Maintenance
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Initialize NVM
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Press the button until
Yes
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.
202 Understanding the Printer Menus
Print Media Guidelines 203
16
Print Media Guidelines
Print media can be paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality
printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing
troubles. This section describes selecting print media, caring for print media, and loading the print media in
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) or Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI).
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
Paper
For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. For the best print quality in
black and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. Before buying large quantities of any print media,
it is recommended that you try a sample first.
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See
"Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211 and "Loading Print Media in the Priority
Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219 for detailed loading instructions.
Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It is recommended that you follow these
guidelines when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
Both MPF and PSI automatically feed paper whose weights range from 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 44 lb bond) grain long.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) may not feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75
g/m2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl
usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped, even in the feeder, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems
regardless of humidity. When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the MPF or PSI.
Smoothness
The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is too rough, the toner does not fuse to the
paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems.
Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture Content
The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper
properly. Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper
to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Grain Direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long
fibers are recommended. For paper heavier than 135 g/m2 (36 lb bond), grain short is preferred.
204 Print Media Guidelines
Fiber Content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. Paper containing fibers such as
cotton possess characteristics that can result in degraded paper handling.
Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use dry 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic paper. Business paper
designed for general business use also provide acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high
temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. The laser printing process heats paper
to high temperatures. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is
acceptable for laser printers.
NOTE: Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When choosing any print media,
you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.
Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless paper, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit
• Preprinted paper that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±0.09 inches, such
as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.
• Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, thermal paper
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper
• Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19 309
• Multiple-part forms or documents
• Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when printing on talc or acid paper.
• Moist paper that may cause wrinkle
Selecting Paper
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
• Always use new, dry, and undamaged paper.
• Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated
on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.
• Do not remove the PSI while a job is printing.
• Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the MPF or PSI.
• Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.
Print Media Guidelines 205
Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead
When selecting preprinted media and letterhead paper for the printer:
• Use grain long paper for best results.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Select paper that absorb ink, but do not bleed.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
• Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copying machines. The ink must
withstand temperatures of 225°C (437°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner or the silicone in the fusing unit. Inks that are oxidation-set or
oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Printing on Letterhead
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre-printed letterhead you have selected is
acceptable for laser printers.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following illustration for help when loading
letterhead in the print media sources.
Loading Letterhead
Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that the title on the letterhead enters the
printer first.
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
206 Print Media Guidelines
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper
Pre-punched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes and in manufacturing techniques.
However, it may not be possible to print on the paper to depending on the placement of holes on the paper.
To select and use pre-punched paper:
• Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre-punched paper.
• Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled
paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.
• Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may require more frequent
cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper.
• Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper.
Envelopes
Depending on the choice of envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of light wrinkling. Before buying large
quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first. See "Loading Print Media in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211 or "Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219
for instructions on loading an envelope.
When printing on envelopes:
• Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.
• Set the print media source to MPF or PSI. Set the paper type to
Envelope
, and select the correct size of envelope
from the printer driver.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 75 g/m
2
(20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g/m
2
(28 lb
bond) weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. Envelopes with 100% cotton
content must not exceed 90 g/m
2
(24 lb bond) weight.
• Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes.
• Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with the
envelope supplier.
• Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
• To load envelope in MPF or PSI, the print side must be facing up.
• See
"Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 216
or
"Loading an Envelope in the
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 221
for instructions on loading an envelope.
• Use one envelope size during a print job.
• Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60%) and the high printing temperatures may
seal the envelopes.
• For best performance, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, embossing
– Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have nicked edges or bent corners
Print Media Guidelines 207
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
Labels
Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers.
When selecting labels:
• Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205°C
(401°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi).
• Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
CAUTION: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.
When printing on labels:
• Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
• Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver.
• Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the
label.
• Do not print a label through the printer more than once.
• Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
• Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam.
• Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is recommended that zone coating of the
adhesive is done at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your printer and
could void your warranty.
WARNING: Otherwise a jam occurs in the printer and contaminate your printer and your cartridges with adhesive. As a result,
could void your printer and cartridge warranties.
Storing Print Media
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help avoid media feeding problems and uneven print
quality.
• For best results, store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the
relative humidity is 40%.
• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so
that the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
208 Print Media Guidelines
Identifying Print Media and Specifications
This section provides information on supported paper sizes, types, and specification.
Supported Paper Sizes
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
A4 (210x297 mm) YY
B5 (182x257 mm) YY
A5 (148x210 mm) YY
C5 (162x229 mm) YY
Monarch (3.875x7.5 in) YY
Monarch LEF (7.5x3.875 in)*1 YY
*4
Envelope #10 (4.125x9.5 in) YY
DL (110x220 mm) YY
DL LEF (220x110 mm)*1 YY
*4
Letter (8.5x11 in) YY
Legal (8.5x14 in) YY
Folio (8.5x13 in) YY
Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in) YY
Custom*2*3 YY
*1 You can place the originals in a long-edge feed direction or in a short-edge feed direction. The following illustration shows SEF and LEF.
The arrow mark in the illustration shows the orientation of the paper loading.
NOTE: Not available when the XML Paper Specification (XPS) Printer Driver is used.
*2 Custom width: 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)
The maximum width for envelope (DL LEF): 220.0 mm (8.66 inches)
Custom length: 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)
The maximum length for envelope (Monarch LEF): 98.4 mm (3.87 inches)
*3 Only the administrator user can set the custom size from the printer driver.
*4 Be sure to fully insert the envelope until it stops. Otherwise, print media that is loaded on the MPF will be fed.
SEF LEF
Print Media Guidelines 209
Supported Paper Types
Paper Type Specifications
Media Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
Plain Y*Y*
Plain Side 2 YY
Plain Thick YY
Plain Thick Side 2 YY
Recycled YY
Recycled Side 2 YY
Label YY
Covers YY
Covers Side 2 YY
Envelope YY
Coated YY
Coated Side 2 YY
* Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Paper type Weight (gsm) Remarks
Plain Paper 60-90 -
Plain Thick Paper 91-105 -
Covers 106-163 -
Coated 106-163 Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.
Label - Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.
Envelopes - -
Recycled 60-105 -
210 Print Media Guidelines
Loading Print Media 211
17
Loading Print Media
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
Before loading print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is usually on
the print media package.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
NOTE: After loading paper in the feeder, specify the same paper type on the operator panel.
Capacity
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) can hold:
• 150 sheets of standard paper
• 16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of thick paper
• One sheet of coated paper
• 16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of post cards
• Five envelopes
• 16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of labels
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) can hold:
• 10 sheets of standard paper or one sheet of other paper
Print Media Dimensions
Both MPF and PSI accept print media within the following dimensions:
• Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)
• Length — 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
1
Open the front cover.
212 Loading Print Media
2
Pull the PSI out.
3
Pull the length guide forward until it stops.
4
Pull the MPF extension forward until it stops.
Loading Print Media 213
5
Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum.
6
Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack
on a level surface.
7
Load print media on the MPF with the top edge first and with the recommended print side facing up.
214 Loading Print Media
8
Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the stack of print media.
9
Slide the length guide towards the printer until it touches the print media.
NOTE: Depending on the size of print media, first slide the MPF extension backward until it stops, and then pinch the
length guide and slide it backward until it touches print media.
Loading Print Media 215
10
Insert the PSI into the printer and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper tray.
11
Select the paper type from the operator panel if any print media other than plain print media is loaded. If a
user-specified print media is loaded in the MPF, you must specify the paper size setting by using the operator
panel.
NOTE: For standard-size papers, adjust the guides first and then set papers.
216 Loading Print Media
Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
NOTE: When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the printer driver. If not specified, the print
image will be rotated 180 degrees.
When Loading Envelope #10, DL, or Monarch
Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, the flap side facing down, and the flap turned to the right.
To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to be loaded with the print-side facing up,
flap opened, and facing you.
Loading Print Media 217
When Loading C5
Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, with the flap open.
CAUTION: Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the
printer.
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid
jams, flatten them as shown below when loading them in the MPF.
218 Loading Print Media
NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the following
illustration.
The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.
NOTE: To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes, see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper
Setup Navigator on the printer driver.
Loading Letterhead
Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that the title on the letterhead enters the
printer first.
Loading Print Media 219
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the PSI while printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Slide the PSI forward, and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper tray.
3
Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum.
220 Loading Print Media
4
Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack
on a level surface.
5
Load print media on the PSI with the top edge first and with the recommended print side facing up.
6
Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the stack of print media.
7
Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is not standard plain paper. If a
user-specified print media is loaded in the PSI, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.
Loading Print Media 221
Loading an Envelope in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
NOTE: Be sure to fully insert the envelope until it stops. Otherwise, print media that is loaded on the MPF will be fed.
NOTE: When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the printer driver. If not specified, the print
image will be rotated 180 degrees.
When Loading Envelope #10, DL, or Monarch
Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, the flap side facing down, and the flap turned to the right.
To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to be loaded with the print-side facing up,
flap opened, and facing you.
222 Loading Print Media
When Loading C5
Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, with the flap open.
CAUTION: Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the
printer.
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the PSI right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid
jams, flatten them as shown below when loading them in the PSI.
Loading Print Media 223
NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the following
illustration.
The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.
NOTE: To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes, see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper
Setup Navigator on the printer driver.
Loading Letterhead
Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that the title on the letterhead enters the
printer first.
224 Loading Print Media
Loading Print Media When Manual Duplex Printing
NOTE: When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the feeder.
When you start manual duplex printing, the instruction window appears. Note that the window cannot be reopened
once it is closed. Do not close the window until duplex printing is complete.
Manual duplex printing can be done using the MPF or PSI.
When Using the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
1
First print the even pages (rear sides).
For a six page document, rear sides are printed in the order of page 6, page 4, then page 2.
Ready / Error LED blinks and the message appears on the operator panel when the even pages finish printing.
2
After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the output tray and set them as they are (with the
blank side facing up) into the MPF.
NOTE: Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them before setting them.
NOTE: Printing on both sides of the paper is not possible if the document consists of various sizes of papers.
3
Ensure that
Insert Output to Tray Press to Continue Printing
is highlighted, and then
press the
(Set)
button. Print pages in the order page 1 (rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), then page 5
(rear of page 6).
Loading Print Media 225
When Using the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
1
First print the even pages (rear sides).
For a six page document, even pages are printed in the order page 6, page 4, then page 2.
Ready / Error LED blinks and the message appears on the operator panel when the even pages finish printing.
2
After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the output tray and set them as they are (with the
blank side facing up) into the PSI.
NOTE: Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them before setting them.
NOTE: Printing on both sides of the paper is not possible if the document consists of various sizes of papers.
3
Ensure that
Insert Output to Tray Press to Continue Printing
is highlighted, and then
press the
(Set)
button. Print pages in the order page 1 (rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), then page 5
(rear of page 6).
226 Loading Print Media
Using the Output Tray Extension
The output tray extension is designed to prevent print media from falling from the printer after the print job is
complete.
Before printing a document, ensure that the output tray extension is fully extended.
NOTE: When you pull out envelopes or small size print media, lift up the scanner unit.
227
Printing, Copying, Scanning,
and Faxing
18 Printing........................................................................................ 229
19 Copying ....................................................................................... 233
20 Scanning..................................................................................... 245
21 Faxing.......................................................................................... 267
228
Printing 229
18
Printing
This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain lists of information from your printer, and how to cancel a
job.
Tips for Successful Printing
Tips on Storing Print Media
Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print Media" on page 207.
Avoiding Paper Jams
NOTE: It is recommended that you try a limited sample of any print media you are considering using with the printer before
purchasing large quantities.
By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid paper jams. See the following instructions
on loading print media:
• "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211
• "Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219
• "Avoiding Jams" on page 323
If you experience a jam, see "Jam" on page 350 for instructions.
Sending a Job to Print
Install the printer driver to use all the features of the printer. When you choose Print from an application, a window
representing the printer driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job you are sending to print.
Print settings selected from the driver have precedence over the default menu settings selected from the operator
panel or Tool Box.
You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all the available system settings you can change. If
you are not familiar with a feature in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more information.
To print a job from a typical Microsoft® Windows® application:
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the
File
menu, select
Print
.
3
Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the system settings as needed (such as the pages
you want to print or the number of copies).
4
To adjust system settings not available from the first screen, such as Quality, Paper Size, or Image Orientation, click
Preferences
.
The
Printing Preferences
dialog box appears.
5
Specify the print settings. For more information, click
Help
.
6
Click
OK
to close the
Printing Preferences
dialog box.
7
Click
Print
to send the job to the selected printer.
230 Printing
Canceling a Print Job
There are several methods for canceling a print job.
Canceling From the Operator Panel
To cancel a job after it has started printing:
1
Press the
(Cancel)
button.
NOTE: Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will continue to print.
Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.
1
Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2
Select the job you want to cancel.
3
Press <Delete> on the keyboard.
Canceling a Job From the Desktop
1
Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop.
Click
Start
→
Devices and Printers
(for Windows 7 and Windows Server
®
2008 R2).
Click
Start
→
Printers and Faxes
(for Windows XP and 2003).
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Printers
(for Windows Vista
®
).
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Printers
(for Windows Server 2008).
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Devices and Printers
(for Windows 8).
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel
→
Hardware
→
Devices and Printers
(for Windows Server 2012).
A list of available printers appears.
2
Right-click the printer that you selected when you sent the job for print, and then select
See what's printing
.
3
Select the printer driver.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
4
Select the job you want to cancel.
5
Press <Delete> on the keyboard.
Printing 231
Direct Print Using the USB Storage Device
The Print From USB Memory feature allows you to print files stored in a USB storage device by operating from the
operator panel.
NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for USB-Print is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password
to use the print function. If the Function Enabled setting for USB-Print is set to Off, the print function is disabled. For
details, see "Function Enabled" on page 197.
Supported File Formats
Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB storage device.
•PDF
•TIFF
•JPEG
Printing a File in a USB Memory
1
Insert a USB storage device to the USB port of the printer.
USB Memory
appears.
2
Ensure that
Print From
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
Select Document
appears.
3
Press the button until the desired file is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Select printing options as required.
NOTE: You can print files scanned and stored using the Scan to USB Memory feature. Files saved without using the
feature such as files created by user may not be printed properly.
Printing a Report Page
By using the Report / List menu, you can print a various of settings for your printer including printer settings,
panel settings, job history, error history, color test page, protocol monitor, address book, and fax activity. For details
about how to print reports or lists, see "Report / List" on page 174.
232 Printing
Copying 233
19
Copying
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use
the copy function. If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to Off, the copy function is disabled. For details, see
"Function Enabled" on page 197.
Loading Paper for Copying
The instructions for loading print documents are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying. For more
details, see "Loading Print Media" on page 211.
Preparing a Document
You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) to load an original document for
copying, scanning and sending a fax. You can load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents for one job using the
ADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass.
WARNING: Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5.5 in. by 5.5 in. (139.7 mm by 139.7 mm) or larger than 8.5 in. by 14
in. (215.9 mm by 355.6 mm), different sizes or weights together, or booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having
other unusual characteristics in ADF.
WARNING: Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper, wrinkled or creased paper, curled
or rolled paper or torn paper cannot be used in ADF.
WARNING: Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as
glue, ink and correcting fluid in ADF.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the ADF.
Making Copies From the Document Glass
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the ADF, it takes priority over the document on the
document glass.
NOTE: Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy printout. For best results, clean the document
glass before use. For more information, see "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 320.
234 Copying
To make a copy from the document glass:
1
Open the document cover.
2
Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner
of the glass.
3
Close the document cover.
NOTE: Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the toner consumption.
NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the document cover until its hinges are caught by the
stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the cover open.
4
Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, the contrast, and the image quality. For
more information, see "Setting Copy Options" on page 235.
To clear the settings, use the
AC (All Clear) button
.
5
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
NOTE: Press the (Cancel) button to cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document.
Copying 235
Making Copies From the ADF
CAUTION: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35 sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF
output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the ADF.
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
1
Load up to
35 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
documents face up on the ADF with top edge of the documents in first.
Then adjust the document guides to the correct document size.
NOTE: Ensure that you use the document guides before copying a legal-size document.
2
Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, contrast, and image quality. For more
information, see "Setting Copy Options" on page 235.
To clear the settings, use the
AC (All Clear)
button.
3
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
NOTE: Press the (Cancel) button to cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document.
Setting Copy Options
Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing
the
(Start)
button to make copies.
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after copying.
Number of Copies
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad to select the desired value.
4
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
236 Copying
Color
To select mode for color or black and white copying.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the
(Color Mode)
button to select the desired color mode.
4
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to On(Color Password), you need to enter the four digit
password to use the copy function. If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to Off, the copy function is disabled. For
details, see "Function Enabled" on page 197.
Collated
To sort the copy output: For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete three page
document will print followed by the second complete document.
NOTE: Copying documents with a large amount of data may exhaust available memory.
If a memory shortage occurs, cancel the collating by turning Collated to Uncollated on the operator panel.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Ensure that
Collated
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press
the button to select the desired setting, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
5
If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies, contrast, and image quality. See "Setting
Copy Options" on page 235.
6
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
Uncollated* Does not sort the copy job
Collated Sorts the copy job
Auto Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job
Copying 237
Reduce/Enlarge
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400 percent when you copy original documents
from the document glass or ADF.
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy.
NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or Manual.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the
button
until
Reduce/Enlarge
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the
button
to select the desired settings, and then press the
(Set)
button.
mm series
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
inch series
NOTE: You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25% to 400%, or press the button to
enlarge the zoom ratio or press the button to reduce the zoom ratio in 1% intervals.
5
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
200%
A5->A4(141%)
A5->B5(122%)
100%*
B5->A5(81%)
A4->A5(70%)
50%
200%
Stmt->Lgl(154%)
Stmt->Ltr(129%)
100%*
Lgl->Ltr (78%)
Ldgr->Ltr(64%)
50%
238 Copying
Document Size
To specify the default document size:
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the button until
Document Size
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press
the
button to select the desired settings, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
5
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
Original Type
To select the copy image quality.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the button until
Original Type
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button to select the desired settings, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
5
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
*1 The default for
Document Size varies
depending on country specific
factory default.
Text Suitable for documents with text.
Text & Photo* Used for documents with both text and photos.
Photo Suitable for documents with photos.
Copying 239
Lighter/Darker
To adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the button until
Lighter/Darker
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the or
button to select the desired settings, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
5
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
Sharpness
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the button until
Sharpness
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button to select the desired settings, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
5
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
Lighter2 Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.
Lighter1
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1 Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Sharpest Makes the copy sharper than the original.
Sharper
Normal* Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Softer Makes the copy softer than the original.
Softest
240 Copying
Auto Exposure
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the button until
Auto Exposure
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
On
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
Multiple-Up
To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
Auto:
Automatically
reduces the pages
to fit in one page.
ID Copy:
Always prints two
sides of the ID card
in one page in the
original size (by
100%).
Manual:
Reduces the pages in the
custom size depending
on the setting of the
Reduce/Enlarge
menu.
Copying 241
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the button until
Multiple-Up
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button to select the desired setting, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
5
If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies, contrast, and image quality. See "Setting
Copy Options" on page 235.
6
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
When you are using the document glass and
Multiple-Up
is set to
Auto
,
ID Copy
, or
Manual
, the display
prompts you for another page. Press the button to select
Yes
or
No
, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
If you select
Yes
, press the button to select
Continue
or
Cancel
, and then press the
(Set)
button.
Margin Top/Bottom
To specify the top and bottom margins of the copy.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the button until
Margin Top/Bottom
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
5
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
Margin Left/Right
To specify the left and right margins of the copy.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.
Manual Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.
4 mm*/0.2 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
242 Copying
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the button until
Margin Left/Right
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
5
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
Margin Middle
To specify the middle margin of the copy.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Copy)
button.
3
Press the button until
Margin Middle
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
5
Press the
(Start)
button to begin copying.
4 mm*/0.2 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
0 mm*/0.0 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
Copying 243
Changing the Default Settings
The COPY menu options, including contrast, and image quality can be set to the most frequently used modes.
When you copy a document, the default settings are used unless they are changed by using the corresponding
buttons on the operator panel.
NOTE: While you set copy options, pressing the AC (All Clear) button cancels the changed settings and returns to the default
status.
To create your own default settings:
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Ensure that
Defaults Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Ensure that
Copy Defaults
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the or button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and
then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.
8
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
244 Copying
Scanning 245
20
Scanning
Scanning Overview
NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Scan is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use
the scan function. If the Function Enabled setting for Scan is set to Off, the scan function is disabled. For details, see
"Function Enabled" on page 197.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
You can use your Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer to turn pictures and text into editable
images on your computer.
PaperPort® is a program that allows you to organize, find and share all your paper and digital documents, and is
supplied with your printer.
NOTE: PaperPort may not be supported depending on the operating systems.
NOTE: PaperPort application is available only on the
Software and Documentation
disc provided with the printer. The licensed
software application is not available for download from support.dell.com.
The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how you plan to use the image or
document after you scan it in to your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.
Scanning beyond these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application. If you require a
resolution above those recommended in the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by previewing (or
pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.
NOTE: You can use PaperPort's built-in Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software to copy text from scanned documents so
that you can use and edit the text in any text editing, word processing, or spreadsheet program. The OCR process requires
textual images scanned at 150–600 dpi and 300 dpi or 600 dpi is recommended for graphics.
If you prefer to use another application, such as Adobe® Photoshop®, you must assign the application to the printer
by selecting it from the list of available applications through the Select Software button each time you start
scanning. If you do not assign an application to the Select Software button, PaperPort is automatically selected
when you start scanning.
Dell ScanCenter is a PaperPort application that allows you to scan items and send them directly to PaperPort or
other programs on your computer without first running PaperPort. Dell ScanCenter runs as a separate application
from the Microsoft® Windows® start menu and displays the Dell ScanCenter bar. For more information about
using Dell ScanCenter, refer to the PaperPort's Help menu.
NOTE: Dell ScanCenter may not be supported depending on the operating systems.
Type Resolution
Documents 300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or color
Documents of poor quality or that contain small text 400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale
Photographs and pictures 100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale
Images for an inkjet printer 150–300 dpi
Images for a high-resolution printer 300–600 dpi
246 Scanning
Icons on the Dell ScanCenter bar represent the programs that are limited to PaperPort and to Dell ScanCenter. To
scan and send an item to a program, click the program icon and then scan the item. Dell ScanCenter automatically
starts the selected program when the scan is complete.
Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to Application
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Scan)
button.
3
Press the button until
Scan to Application
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Configure the scanning settings as necessary.
5
Press the
(Start)
button.
The selected application window opens on your computer.
NOTE: If the following dialog box appears on your computer, select Dell C1765 MFP Scan Button Manager, and then click
OK.
NOTE: Once you check the Always use this program for this action check box when selecting Dell C1765 MFP Scan Button
Manager, the selected application is automatically used without displaying the program selection window.
NOTE: You must use ScanButton Manager on your computer to change the settings for scanning. For details, see "Quick Launch
Utility" on page 292.
Scanning 247
Scanning from the Operator Panel - Scan to WSD
If the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can use the Scan
to WSD function to send scanned images to a computer.
NOTE: To use Scan to WSD, you need to setup connection using WSD.
NOTE: WSD is supported only on Windows Vista®, Windows 7, and Windows 8.
Printer Setup for Scan to WSD
Setup the printer and computer for connection using WSD.
Checking the Printer Setting
To use the Scan to WSD function, WSD needs to be set to Enable. See "Protocol" on page 179 for details.
Setting Up the Computer
NOTE: For Windows 8, the computer automatically connects the printer using WSD. There is no need to install the printer
manually.
For Windows 7:
1
Click
Start
→
Computer
→
Network
2
Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click
Install
. The printer is connected using WSD.
For Windows Vista:
1
Click
Start
→
Network
2
Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click
Install
.
3
Click
Continue
. The printer is connected using WSD.
Procedures for WSD Scan
1
Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Scan)
button.
3
Press the button until
Scan to WSD
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Ensure that
Scan to
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until the desired computer you want to send the scan job to is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button until the desired scan event is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Which application each scan event is associated with depends on the setting on the computer.
7
Press the
(Start)
button.
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver
Your printer supports the Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN) driver for scanning images. TWAIN is one
of the standard components provided by Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server®
2003, and Windows Server 2008, and works with various scanners.
248 Scanning
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.
To scan an image from the PaperPort:
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
On the Windows
Start
menu, click
Nuance PaperPort 14
from
All Programs
, and then click
PaperPort
(for
Windows 8, click the
PaperPort
icon on the
Start
screen).
3
In the
Desktop
tab, click
Scan Settings
in the
Function Pane
group.
4
Click
Select
in the
Scan or Get Photo
pane.
5
In the
Available Scanners
dialog box, select
TWAIN: Dell C1765 MFP Scanner
and then click
OK
.
6
Select your scanning preferences and click
Preview
to display the preview image.
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.
7
Select the desired properties from the
Image Quality
and
Image Options
tabs.
8
Click
Scan
to start scanning.
9
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver
Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by
Windows XP and later operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the
WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software.
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Start the drawing software, such as
Paint
for Windows.
Scanning 249
NOTE: When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, use Windows Photo Gallery instead of Paint.
3
Click
File
→
From Scanner or Camera
(
Paint
button
→
From scanner or camera
for Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012).
The
Scan using Dell C1765 MFP Scanner
window appears.
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.
4
Select your scanning preferences and click
Adjust the quality of the scanned picture
to display the
Advanced Properties
dialog box.
5
Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then click
OK
.
6
Click
Scan
to start scanning.
7
Click
Save As
from the
File
menu.
8
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture.
Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP
Overview
The Scan to Server/Computer feature allows you to scan documents and send the scanned document to a network
computer via the FTP or SMB protocol.
250 Scanning
You can select the kind of server and specify a destination to store the scanned document with the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.
The following items are required to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.
•Using SMB
To transfer data via SMB, your computer must run on one of the following operating systems that includes folder
sharing.
For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.
•Windows XP
•Windows Vista
•Windows 7
•Windows 8
• Windows Server 2003
• Windows Server 2008
• Windows Server 2008 R2
• Windows Server 2012
• Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6
•Using FTP
To transfer data via FTP, one of the following FTP servers and an account to the FTP server (login name and
password) are required.
•Windows XP
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0/4.0 or Internet Information Services 5.0/5.1
• Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 R2
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0
• Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 8.0
Scan
Using FTP
Using SMB
FTP Server
Computer
Computer
Scanning 251
•Mac OS X
FTP service of Mac OS X 10.4.2/10.4.4/10.4.8/10.4.9/10.4.10/10.4.11/10.5/10.6/10.7
For information on how to configure the FTP service, contact your system administrator.
Follow the procedure below to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.
Confirming a Login name and Password
When using SMB:
The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user login account with a valid and non-empty password for
authentication. Confirm a login user name and password.
If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password on your User Login Account with the
following procedure.
For Windows Vista and Windows 7:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Click
User Accounts and Family Safety
.
3
Click
User Accounts
.
4
Click
Create a password for your account
and add in a password for your user login account.
"Confirming a Login name and Password" on page 251
"Specifying a Destination to Store the Document" on page 252
"Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 259
"Sending the Scanned File on the Network" on page 263
252 Scanning
For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012
1
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel
.
2
Click
Change PC settings
.
3
Click
Users
.
4
Click
Create a Password
and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows XP:
1
Click
start
→
Control Panel
→
User Accounts
.
2
Click
Change an account
.
3
Select your account.
4
Click
Create a password
and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Server 2008:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Double-click
User Accounts
.
3
Click
Create a password for your account
and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:
1
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
.
2
Select
User Accounts
.
3
Click
User Accounts
.
4
Click
Create a password for your account
and add in a password for your user login account.
For Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6
1
Click
System Preferences
→
Accounts
.
2
Select
Change Password
.
3
Enter a password for your user login account in
New password
.
4
Re-enter the password in
Verify
.
After you confirmed a login user name and password, go to "Specifying a Destination to Store the Document" on
page 252.
When using FTP
The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user name and a password. For your user name and password,
contact your system administrator.
Specifying a Destination to Store the Document
When using SMB
Share a folder to store the scanned document using the following procedure.
For Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 2012
1
Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name,
MyShare
).
2
Right-click the folder, and then select
Properties
.
Scanning 253
3
Click the
Sharing
tab, and then select
Advanced Sharing
.
4
Select the
Share this folder
check box.
5
Enter a shared name in the
Share name
box.
NOTE: Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
6
Click
Permissions
to give write permission for this folder.
7
Click
Add
.
8
Search user login name by clicking
Advanced
, or enter the user login name in the
Enter the object names
to select
box and click
Check Names
to confirm (Example of user login name,
MySelf
).
254 Scanning
9
Click
OK
when you are done.
10
Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the
Full Control
check box. This will grant you
permission to send the document to this folder.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
11
Click
OK
.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 259.
For Windows XP Home Edition:
1
Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name,
MyShare
).
2
Right-click on the folder, and then select
Properties
.
3
Click on the
Sharing
tab, and then select
Share this folder on the network
.
4
Enter a shared name in the
Share name
box.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.
Scanning 255
NOTE: When the following screen appears, click If you understand the security risks but want to share files without
running the wizard, click here, then select Just enable file sharing, and then click OK.
5
Select
Allow network users to change my files
.
256 Scanning
6
Click
OK
.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
Example: Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory
After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 259.
For Windows XP Professional Edition:
1
Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name,
MyShare
) and double-click
the folder.
2
Select
Folder Options
from
Tools
.
3
Click
View
tab, and then clear the checkbox of
Use simple file sharing (Recommended)
.
4
Click
OK
, and then close the window.
5
Right-click the folder, and then select
Properties
.
6
Select the
Sharing
tab, and then select
Share this folder
.
7
Enter a shared name in the
Share name
box.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.
Scanning 257
8
Click on
Permissions
to create a write permission for this folder.
9
Click
Add
.
10
Search user login name by clicking
Advanced
, or enter the user login name in the
Enter the object names
to select
box and click
Check Names
to confirm (Example of user login name,
MySelf
).
11
Click
OK
.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
12
Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the
Full Control
check box. This will grant you
permission to send the document into this folder.
258 Scanning
13
Click
OK
.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 259.
For Mac OS X 10.4:
1
Select
Go
from the
Finder
menu, and then click
Home
.
2
Double-click
Public
.
3
Create a folder (Example of folder name,
MyShare
).
NOTE: Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
4
Open
System Preferences
, and then click
Sharing
.
5
Check the
File Sharing
check box and the
Windows Sharing
check box.
For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6:
1
Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name,
MyShare
).
NOTE: Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
2
Select the created folder, and then select
Get Info
from the
File
menu.
3
Check the
Shared folder
check box, and then close the window.
4
Open
System Preferences
, and then click
Sharing
.
5
Check the
File Sharing
check box, and then click
Options
.
6
Check the
Share Files and folders using SMB
check box and your account name.
7
Click
Done
.
When Using FTP
For a destination to store the document, contact your system administrator.
Scanning 259
Configuring the Printer Settings
You can configure the printer settings to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature with the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.
From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
1
Open a web browser.
2
Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar.
NOTE: For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Settings" on page 55.
3
Click
Go
.
The printer's web page appears.
4
Click
Address Book
if a security login dialog box appears, type in the correct user name and password.
NOTE: The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL).
5
Click the
Server Address
tab.
6
Select any unused number and click
Create
.
The
Server Address
page appears.
260 Scanning
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
1Name Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book.
2Server Type Select SMB if you store the document in a shared folder of your computer.
Select FTP if you use a FTP server.
3Server Address Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server that you have shared out.
IPv4 and IPv6 are both supported.
The following are examples:
•For
FTP
:
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address (IPv4): 192.168.1.100
•For
SMB
:
Server name: myhost
IP address (IPv4): 192.168.1.100
4Share Name For SMB only.
On the Windows operating system, enter the share name of the folder to store the scanned
document on the recipient computer.
On the Mac OS, enter the folder name to store the scanned document on the recipient
computer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Scanning 261
After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File on the Network" on page 263.
From the Address Book Editor
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Address Book Editor
.
The
Select Device
window appears.
2
Select your printer from the list.
3
Click
OK
.
4
Click
Tool
→
New (Device Address Book)
→
Server
.
5Server Path For SMB
To store the scanned document in the share folder directly without creating any subfolder, leave
the space blank.
To store the scanned document in the folder you created under the share folder, enter the path as
following.
Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder
name: John
You should now see MyShare\Mypic\John in your directory.
In this case, enter the following item.
Server Path: \MyPic\John
For FTP
Enter the server path to store the scanned document.
6Server Port Number Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139 for SMB
and 21 for FTP.
7Login Name Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or FTP
server.
8Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.
NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to Computer feature. Ensure that you have a valid
password for the user login account. (See "Confirming a Login name and Password" on page 251 for
details on how to add a password in your user login account.)
9Re-enter Password Re-enter your password.
MyShare (Share folder)
MyPic
John
262 Scanning
The
Server Address
dialog box appears.
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
1Name Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book.
2Server Type Select Computer (SMB) if you store the document in a shared folder of your computer.
Select Server (FTP) if you use a FTP server.
3Computer Settings
wizard
Clicking this button opens the wizard screen which guides you through several steps.
When you complete the steps in the wizard, the items 4 to 10 are entered automatically. For
details, click Help.
1
2
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Scanning 263
After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File on the Network" on page 263.
Sending the Scanned File on the Network
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
4Sever Name /
IP Address
Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server that you have shared out.
IPv4 and IPv6 are both supported.
The following are examples:
•For
Computer (SMB)
:
Server name: myhost
IP address (IPv4): 192.168.1.100
•For
Server (FTP)
:
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address (IPv4): 192.168.1.100
5Share Name Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.
6Path For SMB
To store the scanned document in the share folder directly without creating any subfolder, leave
the space blank.
To store the scanned document in the folder you created under the share folder, enter the path as
following.
Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder
name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
In this case, enter the following item.
Path: \MyPic\John
For FTP
Enter the path to store the scanned document.
7Login Name Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or FTP
server.
8Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.
NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to Server/Computer feature. Ensure that you have a
valid password for the user login account. (See "Confirming a Login name and Password" on
page 251 for details on how to add a password in your user login account).
9Confirm Login
Password
Re-enter your password.
10 Port Number Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139 for SMB
and 21 for FTP.
MyShare (Share folder)
MyPic
John
264 Scanning
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Scan)
button.
3
Press the button until
Scan to Network
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Ensure that
Scan to
is highlighted, press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button to select
Computer(Network)
or
Server(FTP)
, or
Search Address book
, and
then press the
(Set)
button.
Computer(Network)
: Stores the scanned image on the computer by using the SMB protocol.
Server(FTP)
: Stores the scanned image on the server by using the FTP protocol.
Search Address Book
: Select the server address registered in Address Book.
6
Press the button to select the destination to store the scanned file in, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Press the
(Start)
button to send the scanned files.
Scanning to USB Storage Device
The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to scan documents and save the scanned data to a USB storage device.
To scan documents and save them, follow the steps below:
1
Insert the USB storage device into the USB port on your printer.
2
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
3
Press the
(Scan)
button.
4
Ensure that
Scan to USB Memory
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until the your desired folder is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the
(Start)
button.
Scanning 265
Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image
To send an e-mail attached with the scanned image from your printer, follow the steps below:
•Set up
E-Mail Server Settings
of
E-Mail Alert
on the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
. See "E-Mail Alert" on
page 100 for more details. For information about your e-mail server, contact your system administrator or your local
Internet service provider (ISP).
• Setup the e-mail address book through the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
. See "Setting an E-Mail Address
Book" on page 265 for more details.
Setting an E-Mail Address Book
1
Open a web browser.
2
Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar and click
Go
. The printer's Web page appears.
3
Click the
Address Book
tab.
The login dialog box appears.
4
Type in the administrator login ID and password registered on the printer.
5
Click
Address Book
.
266 Scanning
6
Click
Create
.
7
Enter a name and e-mail address in the
Name
and
E-Mail Address
fields.
8
Click
Apply New Settings
.
Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned File
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Scan)
button.
3
Press the button until
Scan to E-Mail
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Ensure that
E-Mail to
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button to select the setting listed below, and then press the
(Set)
button.
Keypad:
Type the e-mail address directly and then press the
(Set)
button.
Address Book
: Select the e-mail address registered in the E-Mail Address Book, and then press the
(Set)
button.
E-Mail Group
: Select the e-mail group registered in the E-Mail Groups, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Users need to be registered before you can select Address Book on the operator panel.
6
Press the
(Start)
button to send e-mail.
Faxing 267
21
Faxing
NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Fax is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use the
fax function. If the Function Enabled setting for Fax is set to Off, the fax function is disabled. For details, see "Function
Enabled" on page 197.
NOTE: If the Panel Lock Set is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to enter the Admin Menu.
Configuring Fax Initial Settings
NOTE: The following settings can be configured also using Advance Tools on Easy Setup Navigator.
Setting Your Country
You need to set the country where your printer is used for using the fax service on the printer.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Fax Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Country
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button to select the country where the printer is used, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Ensure that
Are You Sure?
is displayed, press the button to select
Yes
, and then press the
(Set)
button.
The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.
NOTE: In case of either one, when you configure the country setting, the information, which is registered to the device, is
initialized.
Setting the Printer ID
In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send. The printer ID,
containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from
your printer.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Fax Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Fax Number
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Enter your fax number using the number keypad.
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the (Backspace) button to delete the last digit.
7
Press the
(Set)
button when the number on the display is correct.
8
Press the button until
Fax Header Name
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
9
Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad.
You can enter alphanumeric characters using the numeric keypad, including special symbols by pressing the 1, *,
and # buttons.
268 Faxing
For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to
Enter Characters" on page 94.
10
Press the
(Set)
button when the name on the display is correct.
11
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
Setting the Time and Date
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
System Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Date & Time
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Ensure that
Set Date
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Enter the correct date using the numeric keypad, or press the button to select the correct date.
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the button to re-enter the digit.
8
Press the
(Set)
button when the date on the display is correct.
9
Press the button until
Set Time
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
10
Enter the correct time using the numeric keypad, or press the button to select the correct time.
11
Press the
(Set)
button when the time on the display is correct.
12
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
Changing the Clock Mode
You can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
System Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Date & Time
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button until
Date Format
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Press the button until the desired format is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
8
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
Setting Sounds
Speaker Volume
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Fax Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Line Monitor
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
Faxing 269
7
Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.
Ringer Volume
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Fax Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Ring Tone Volume
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press
the
button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.
Specifying the Fax Settings
Changing the Fax Settings Options
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Fax Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the or button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad.
7
Press the
(Set)
button to save the selection.
8
If necessary, repeat steps 5 to 7.
9
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
270 Faxing
Available Fax Settings Options
You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:
Option Description
Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the
handset of the external telephone, and then pressing the remote receive code.
Fax Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone/Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for
the time specified in Auto Rec TEL/FAX, and then the printer automatically
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the
internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Ans Machine/Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this
mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are
fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your
country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France
and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.
DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a
distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the
telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate
number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to
monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Auto Rec Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Rec TEL/FAX Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone
receives an incoming call.
Auto Rec Ans/FAX Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering
machine receives an incoming call.
Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal
speaker until a connection is made.
Ring Tone Volume Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the
internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Line Type Sets the line type.
Tone/Pulse Sets the dialing type.
Resend Delay Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.
Redial Attempts Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy. If you enter
0, the printer will not redial.
Redial Delay Specifies the interval between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax
numbers registered in the Phone Book.
Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Rcv Tone Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.
Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Fax Header Name Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be
entered.
Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a service provided by some telephone
companies.
Faxing 271
Prefix Dial
NOTE: Prefix Dial only supports the environment where you send a fax to the external line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must
do the following from the operator panel.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Fax Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Line Type
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button until
PBX
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Press the
(Back)
button to return to the previous menu.
8
Press the button until
Prefix Dial
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
9
Press the button until
On
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
10
Press the
(Back)
button to return to the previous menu.
11
Press the button until
Prefix Dial Num
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
12
Enter an up-to-five-digit prefix number from 0
–
9, *, and #.
13
Press the
(Set)
button when the prefix dial number on the display is correct.
14
Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.
Forward Settings Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Fax Fwd Number Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Prefix Dial Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Num Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started.
It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit
onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the
output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.
ECM Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.
Modem Speed Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.
Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or
only when an error occurs.
Protocol Monitor Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.
Country Sets the country where the printer is used.
Option Description
272 Faxing
Sending a Fax
You can fax data from your printer. You can also directly fax data transferred from the computer running a
Microsoft® Windows® operating system.
Loading an Original Document on the ADF
CAUTION: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35 sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF
output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the ADF.
1
Place the document(s) face up on the ADF with the top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document
guides to the correct document size.
2
Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Resolution" on page 273.
Loading an Original Document on the Document Glass
1
Open the document cover.
Faxing 273
2
Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner
of the glass.
3
Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Resolution" on page 273.
4
Close the document cover.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the ADF, it takes priority over the document on the
document glass.
NOTE: If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the document cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and
then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start faxing with the cover open.
Resolution
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission:
1
Press the
(Fax)
button.
2
Press the button until
Resolution
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.
Original Type
To select the default original type for the current fax job:
1
Press the
(Fax)
button.
2
Press the button until
Original Type
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-
matrix printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports the super fine resolution.
Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
274 Faxing
3
Press the button to select the desired setting, and then press the
(Set)
button.
Lighter/Darker
To adjust the contrast to make the fax lighter or darker than the original:
1
Press the
(Fax)
button.
2
Press the button until
Lighter/Darker
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the or button to select the desired setting, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Sending a Fax Automatically
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF:
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Fax)
button.
3
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more information, see "Resolution" on page 273.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 274.
4
You can select a fax number in one of the following ways:
• Ensure that
Fax to
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button. Press the button until
Phone
Book
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button. Press the button to select the recipients.
•Press the
One Touch Dial
button.
•Press the
(Contacts)
button, select
All Entries
,
Group Dial
, or
Search
using the button,
and then press the
(Set)
button.
•Press the
(Redial/Pause)
button to redial.
•Press the
(Speed Dial)
button. Enter the speed dial number between 01 and 99 using the numeric
keypad, and then press the
(Set)
button.
Text Suitable for documents with text.
Photo Suitable for documents with photos.
Lighter2 Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.
Lighter1
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1 Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
All Entries Displays a list of registered fax numbers. Press the button to select the recipients.
Group Dial Press the button to select the recipients.
Search Searches a fax number from the Phone Book. Enter the text you want to search, and then press
the (Set) button. Press the button to select the recipients.
Faxing 275
NOTE: Before you use the One Touch Dial button, you need to register a number for the speed dial. For more information on
how to store the number, see "Automatic Dialing" on page 282.
5
Press the
(Start)
button.
When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. Press the button to select
Yes
or
No
, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
The number is dialed and then the printer begins sending the fax when the remote fax machine is ready.
NOTE: Press the (Cancel) button to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.
Sending a Fax Manually
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Fax)
button.
3
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more information, see "Resolution" on page 273.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 274.
4
Press the button until
OnHook
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
On
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad.
• If the document is loaded on the ADF, press the
(Start)
button.
• If the document is not loaded on the ADF, press the
(Start)
button,
press the
button until the desired
setting appears, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: Press the (Cancel) button and the (Set) button to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.
Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and returns to the standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display.
If you receive an error message, p
ress
the (Cancel) button to clear the message and try to send the document
again.
You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission. For more
information, see "Printing a Report" on page 287.
Automatic Redialing
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the printer will automatically redial
the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see "Available Fax Settings Options"
on page 270.
NOTE: The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the number was manually entered.
276 Faxing
Sending a Delayed Fax
The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified time in order to take
advantage of lower long distance rates.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
Press the
(Fax)
button.
3
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more information, see "Resolution" on page 273.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 274.
4
Press the button until
Delayed Start
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
On
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Enter the start time using the numeric keypad or press the or button to select the start time, and then
press the
(Set)
button.
7
Press the button until
Fax to
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
8
Ensure that
Keypad
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
9
Enter the number of the remote machine using the numeric keypad, and then press the
(Set)
button.
You can also use speed dial or group dial numbers. For more information, see "Automatic Dialing" on page 282.
Press the
(Start)
button to begin faxing.
Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all the documents to be faxed to its memory and sends
them at the specified time. After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.
NOTE: If you turn off and on the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as the printer is activated.
Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)
You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver.
NOTE: Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.
Example
Send data via the Dell C1765nf
Color MFP FAX or Dell C1765nfw
Color MFP FAX driver
Sending machine (Dell
C1765nf/C1765nfw Color
Multifunction Printer)
Send fax
Receiving machine (fax
machine/multifunction
printer)
Faxing 277
For Windows:
NOTE: The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on
the application you are using.
NOTE: To use this feature, you must install the fax driver.
1
Open the file you want to send by fax.
2
Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select
Dell C1765nf Color MFP FAX
or
Dell C1765nfw
Color MFP FAX
.
3
Click
Preferences
.
4
The
Printing Preferences
dialog box appears. Specify the fax settings. For more information, click the
Help
of the
driver.
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.
5
Click
OK
to close the
Printing Preferences
dialog box.
6
Click
Print
. The
Set / Check Fax Transmission
: dialog box appears.
278 Faxing
7
Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:
• Enter a name and phone number directly.
• Select a recipient from a phone book saved on your computer.
• Select a recipient from a database other than a phone book or address book.
For more information on how to specify the destination, see the
Help
of the driver.
NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked
with a password.
8
Click
Start Sending
.
Faxing 279
For Macintosh:
NOTE: The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on
the application you are using.
NOTE: When using a USB connection on Mac OS 10.4.x, upgrade Common Unix Printing System (CUPS) software to version
1.2.12 or later. You can download it from CUPS web site.
1
Open the file you want to send by fax.
2
Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select
Dell C1765nf Color MFP Fax
or
Dell C1765nfw
Color MFP Fax
.
3
Specify the fax settings.
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.
4
Click
Print
. The
Fax Recipient
dialog box appears.
5
Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:
• Enter a name and phone number directly.
• Select a recipient from a phone book saved on your computer.
280 Faxing
NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked
with a password.
6
Click
OK
.
Receiving a Fax
About Receiving Modes
NOTE: To use the Telephone/Fax mode or Ans Machine/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the phone
connector
()
on the back of your printer.
When the memory is full, the fax is received in the Telephone mode.
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the PSI are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying, except that
faxes can only be printed on Letter-, A4-, or Legal-sized paper. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Print
Media" on page 211. For details about setting the paper type and size in the PSI, see "Print Media Guidelines" on
page 203.
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode
Your printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory.
If you receive a fax, the printer automatically goes into the fax mode after a specified period of time and receives the
fax.
To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after receiving an incoming call, see "Available
Fax Settings Options" on page 270.
Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode
To receive a fax manually, pick up the handset of the external telephone, and follow the instructions below.
1
1 Press the
(Fax)
button when you hear fax tones on the external telephone.
OffHook
appears.
2
Press the
(Start)
button
.
3
Press the button until
Manual Receive
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
The printer receives the document.
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans Machine/Fax Mode
To use the Telephone/Fax mode or Ans Machine/Fax mode, you must attach an external telephone to the
phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it would normally. If your printer hears a
fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive a fax.
NOTE: If you have set your printer to Auto Answer Fax and your answering machine is switched off, or no answering
machine is connected to your printer, your printer will automatically go into the Fax mode after a predefined time.
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone
This feature works best when you are using an external telephone connected to the phone connector ( ) on the
back of your printer. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the external telephone without having
to go to the printer.
Faxing 281
When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones, press the two-digit number on the external
telephone.
The printer receives the document.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try pressing the two-
digit keys once again.
The remote receive code is set to Off at the factory. You can change the two-digit number to whatever you choose.
For details on changing the code, see "Available Fax Settings Options" on page 270.
You can also receive the fax by pressing the
(Fax)
button
when you hear the fax tones on the external telephone.
See "Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode" on page 280.
NOTE: Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode
The DRPD is a telephone company service which allows a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing
patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your
telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another
telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your FAX number from outside.
To set up the DRPD:
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Fax Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
DRPD Pattern
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD mode; see "Available Fax Settings Options" on
page 270.
Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone company, ask your
telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.
Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you
receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your printer stores incoming faxes in the
memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables, the printer automatically prints
the fax.
Polling Receive
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
1
Press the
(Fax)
button.
2
Press the button until
Polling Receive
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
On
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Enter the fax number of the remote machine, and then press the
(Set)
button.
282 Faxing
NOTE: For information on how to enter the fax number of the remote machine, see "Sending a Fax Manually" on page 275
or "Sending a Fax Automatically" on page 274.
5
Press the
(Start)
button.
Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (01– 99).
When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you cannot change the speed dial number from
the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Phone Book
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Ensure that
Speed Dial
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button until the desired speed dial number between 01 and 99 is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Ensure that
Name
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
8
Enter the name, and then press the
(Set)
button.
9
Ensure that
Phone Number
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
10
Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad, and then press the
(Set)
button.
To insert a pause between numbers, press the
(Redial/Pause)
button. "-" appears on the display.
11
Ensure that
Apply Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
12
When
Are You Sure?
is displayed, ensure that
Yes
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
13
To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.
14
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2
To enter the speed dial number do either of the following after pressing the
(Fax)
button:
• Ensure that
Fax to
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button. Press the button until
Speed
Dial
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
•Press the
(Speed Dial)
button.
3
Enter the speed dial number between 01 and
99
using the numeric keypad, and then press the
(Set)
button.
The corresponding entry's name briefly displays. To confirm the name again, press the
(Set)
button.
4
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more information, see "Resolution" on page 273.
Faxing 283
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 274.
5
Press the
(Start)
button.
6
The document scans to the memory.
When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. Press the button to select
Yes
to add more documents or to select
No
to begin sending the fax immediately, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed. The document is sent when the remote
fax machine answers.
NOTE: Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple locations. For example, if you enter 0*, you
can send a document to the locations registered between 01 and 09.
Group Dialing
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group of these destinations and
set them under a one-digit group dial location. This allows you to use a group dial number setting to send the same
document to all the destinations in the group.
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.
Setting Group Dial
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Phone Book
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Group Dial
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the button until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6 is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Ensure that
Name
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
8
Enter the name, and then press the
(Set)
button.
9
Ensure that
Speed Dial No
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
10
Press the button until the desired number is highlighted, press the button to select the speed dial numbers,
and then press the
(Set)
button.
11
Ensure that
Apply Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
12
When
Are You Sure?
is displayed, ensure that
Yes
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
13
To store more group dial numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.
14
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
Editing Group Dial
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the selected group.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Phone Book
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Group Dial
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
284 Faxing
6
Press the button until the group dial number that you want to edit is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
To change the group dial name:
a
Ensure that
Name
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
b
Enter a new name, and then press the
(Set)
button.
c
Press the button until
Apply settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
d
When
Are You Sure?
is displayed, ensure that
Yes
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
8
To change the speed dial number:
a
Press the button until
Speed Dial No
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
b
Press the button until the speed dial number that you want to edit is highlighted, and then press the
button to select or deselect the speed dial number. Press the
(Set)
button.
c
Press the button until
Apply settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
d
When
Are You Sure?
is displayed, ensure that
Yes
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
9
To delete the group dial:
a
Press the
(Backspace)
button.
b
Ensure that
Are You Sure?
is displayed, press the button to select
Yes
, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: When you delete the last speed dial in a group, the group itself is not deleted.
10
If you want to edit another group dial number or enter a new group dial number, repeat steps 5 to 9.
11
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission)
You can use group dialing for broadcasting or delayed transmissions.
Follow the procedure of the desired operation (For Delayed transmission, see "Specifying the Fax Settings" on
page 269).
You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the procedure to complete the desired
operation.
Your printer automatically scans the document loaded in the Automatic Document Feeder or on the document glass
into the memory. The printer dials each of the numbers included in the group.
Printing an Address Book List
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a speed dial list.
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Report / List
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Address Book
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
A list of your speed dial entries is printed.
Faxing 285
Other Ways to Fax
Using the Secure Receiving Mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on the secure
fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is
unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will get saved in the memory. When the mode turns off, any
faxes stored will be printed.
NOTE: Before operation, ensure that Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
To turn the secure receiving mode on:
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Secure Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Secure Receive
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Ensure that
Secure Receive Set
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Press
the
button until
Enable
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
NOTE: The factory-default password is 0000.
8
To return to the standby mode, press the
(Menu)
button
.
When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it into memory and the
Job Status
screen displays
Secure Receive
to let you know that there is a fax stored.
NOTE: If you change the password while Secure Receive Set is Enable, perform steps 1 to 5. Press the
button until Change Password is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button. Enter the new password, and then
press the (Set) button.
To print received documents:
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
Job Status
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Secure Receive
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Enter the password, and then press the
(Set)
button.
The faxes stored in memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:
1
Access the
Secure Receive Set
menu by following steps 1 to 6 in "To turn the secure receiving mode on:".
2
Press the button until
Disable
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
286 Faxing
Using an Answering Machine
You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of your printer as shown above.
• Set your printer to the
Ans Machine/Fax
mode and set
Auto Rec Ans/FAX
to specify the time for the
TAD.
• When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are received and then starts
receiving the fax.
• If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into the
Fax
after the ring tone sounds for a
predefined time.
Using a Computer Modem
If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up Internet connection, connect the computer
modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown above.
• Set your printer to the
Ans Machine/Fax
mode and set
Auto Rec Ans/FAX
to specify the time for the
TAD.
• Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.
• Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax.
• Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the computer modem.
To the wall
jack
Printer Line Telephone Answering Device Phone
To the Internet
Printer
Line
Telephone Answering Device Phone
Computer
Faxing 287
Printing a Report
The following reports may be useful when using fax:
Address Book
This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the memory of the printer as Address Book information.
Fax Activity
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
Protocol Monitor
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
Procedures:
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Report / List
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until the report or list you want to print is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
The selected report or list is printed.
Changing Fax Defaults
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Ensure that
Defaults Settings
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Fax Defaults
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Press the or button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and
then press the
(Set)
button.
7
Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.
8
To return to the previous screen, press the
(Back)
button.
288 Faxing
289
Know Your Printer
22 Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows® Only) ... 291
23 Understanding Printer Messages .......................................... 295
24 Specifications............................................................................ 301
290
Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows® Only) 291
22
Understanding Your Printer Software
(Windows® Only)
Use the
Software and Documentation
disc that shipped with your printer to install a combination of software
programs, depending on your operating system.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
Printer Status Window
The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an error occurs, for example, when a paper
jam occurs or toner is running low.
By default, the Printer Status window launches only when an error occurs. When an error occurs, the error message
appears on the Printer Status window. You can set the Printer Status window to always launch when printing in
Printing Status Window Properties.
You can also check the toner level of your printer.
Status Monitor Console
Use the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple instances of the Status Window for a particular printer.
Select a printer from the list view (or Printer Selection) by clicking its name to open a Status Window for a
particular printer.
Dell Supplies Management System
You can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the All Programs menu or the desktop icon.
You can order consumables by phone or from the web.
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Dell Supplies
Management System
.
The
Dell Supplies Management System
window appears.
2
Select your printer from the
Select Printer Model
list.
3
If you are ordering from the web:
a
Select a web address from the
Select Reorder URL
list.
b
Click
Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site
.
Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw Color MFP - Dell Supplies Management System
window appears.
c
Enter the Service Tag, and then click
OK
.
If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the
Order by Phone
section.
292 Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows® Only)
Quick Launch Utility
Using the Quick Launch Utility window, you can open the Status Window, Tool Box, Troubleshooting, Address
Book Editor, ScanButton Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.
To use the Quick Launch Utility, select to install the Quick Launch Utility when you install the Dell software.
To open the Quick Launch Utility window:
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765
Color Multifunction Printer
→
Quick Launch Utility.
The
Quick Launch Utility
dialog box opens.
2
The
Quick Launch Utility
window provides six buttons;
Status Window
,
Tool Box
,
Troubleshooting
,
Address
Book Editor
,
ScanButton Manager
, and
Dell ScanCenter.
To exit, click
X
at the top-right of the window.
For details, click
Help
of each application.
Status Window Click to open the Printer Status window. See "Printer Status Window" on page 291.
Tool Box Click to open the Tool Box. See "Understanding the Tool Box Menus" on page 139.
Troubleshooting*1 Click to open the Troubleshooting Guide, which allows you to resolve issues by yourself.
Address Book Editor Click to open the Address Book Editor, which allows you to create and edit Address Book entries.
ScanButton Manager Click to open the ScanButton Manager, which allows you to specify how the ScanButton
Manager behaves for scan events that the device generates.
Dell ScanCenter*2 Click to open the Dell ScanCenter.
*1 Troubleshooting Guide is the Portable Document Format (PDF) file. This item needs software to view the document.
*2 Dell ScanCenter may not be displayed depending on the operating systems.
Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows® Only) 293
Address Book Editor
NOTE: You must install the fax driver before reading or editing the Address Book entries.
For more information about Address Book Editor, see the Help of Address Book Editor.
ScanButton Manager
The Scan to Application stores the image files in the My Documents folder by default, and then you can
open them using the related application. Use ScanButton Manager to change the output destination of the
obtained image files and to select whether to open the image files using the related application.
1Read the Device Address Book entries from the printer to the Address Book Editor and read the PC Fax Address Book
entries from the PC to the Address Book Editor.
2Allows you to edit a selected Address Book entry in the edit dialog box.
3Deletes a selected Address Book entry.
4Displays Address Book entries.
1
4
2 3
294 Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows® Only)
Dell ScanCenter
Dell ScanCenter is a PaperPort® application that allows you to scan items and send them directly to PaperPort or
other programs on your computer without running the PaperPort program first. For more information about using
Dell ScanCenter, refer to PaperPort's Help menu.
NOTE: PaperPort may not be supported depending on the operating systems.
NOTE: PaperPort application is available only on the
Software and Documentation
disc provided with the printer. The licensed
software application is not available for download from support.dell.com.
Understanding Printer Messages 295
23
Understanding Printer Messages
The printer operator panel displays messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible printer
problems you must resolve. This chapter describes messages, their meanings, and how to clear the messages.
CAUTION: When an error code is displayed, the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the
memory of the printer are not secured.
Error-Code What you can do
001-360 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell™. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.
003-340
003-356
005-121 Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF" on page 325.
005-301 Close the ADF cover.
006-370 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.
007-340
007-371
009-360 Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner Cartridge" on page 312.
009-361
009-362
009-363
009-654 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.
010-354
010-377
016-315
016-317
016-338
016-344
016-347
016-354
016-355
016-370
016-372
016-374
016-375
016-376
016-377
016-393 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.
016-395
016-503 Press the
(Set) button. Check if SMTP server and DNS server are set correctly.
016-504 Press the
(Set) button. Check if user name and password for POP3 server and DNS server are set correctly.
016-507 Press the
(Set) button. Check if user name and password used for SMTP server are set correctly.
296 Understanding Printer Messages
016-700 Press the
(Set) button to cancel the current print job.
016-701
016-720
016-744 Press the
(Set) button. Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.
016-745
016-749 Press the
(Set) button to cancel the current print job.
016-764 Press the
(Set) button. Contact SMTP server administrator.
016-766
016-767 Press the
(Set) button. Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.
016-794 Press the (Set) button to clear the message.
016-795
016-797
016-920 Press the
(Set) button. Execute the operation again according to the operation procedure.
016-921
016-981 Press the
(Set) button to cancel the current print job. If you are copying using Collated, change the
setting to Uncollated and try copying again. See "Setting Copy Options" on page 235.
016-985 Press the
(Set) button. Retry scanning by lowering the resolution setting or changing the file format of the
scanned image.
017-970
017-980 Press the
(Set) button to clear the message.
017-981
017-988
024-914 Load the specified paper. See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211 or
"Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219.
024-969 Load the appropriate paper. See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211 or
"Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219.
026-720 Press the
(Set) button to clear the message.
026-721
026-722
026-723
026-750
026-751
026-752
027-446 Change IP address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again.
027-452
031-521 Press the
(Set) button. Confirm login-able computer with your system administrator.
031-526 Press the
(Set) button. Check DNS connection, or check if forwarding destination server is registered with
DNS.
031-529 Press the
(Set) button. Check if password is correct.
031-530 Press the
(Set) button. Check if storage location is correct. Storage location you specified is DFS setting,
and check if it is linked to other server. Specify directly linked server, share name, and storage location.
Error-Code What you can do
Understanding Printer Messages 297
031-533 Press the
(Set) button. Check the following:
• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.
• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.
031-534
031-535 Press the
(Set) button. Check if other user is not operating file in storage location you specified.
031-536
031-537 Press the
(Set) button. Check if storage location has free space.
031-555 Press the
(Set) button to clear the message.
031-556
031-557 Press the
(Set) button. Change the file name that already exists on FTP server.
031-558 Press the
(Set) button to clear the message.
031-571
031-574 Press the
(Set) button. Check DNS connection, or check if name of forwarding destination server is
registered with DNS.
031-575 Press the
(Set) button. Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server address as IP address.
031-576 Press the
(Set) button. Check if the printer communicates with forwarding destination FTP server. For
example, check connection of network cable and if the IP address of the server is correct.
031-578 Press the
(Set) button. Check if login name (user name) and password are correct.
031-579 Press the
(Set) button. Check if storage location is correct.
031-582 Press the
(Set) button. Check if the file name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if
storage location has free space.
031-584 Press the
(Set) button. Check if the folder name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if
the folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.
031-585 Press the
(Set) button. Check server access rights.
031-587
031-588 Press the
(Set) button. Check if storage location has free space.
031-589 Press the
(Set) button to clear the message.
031-594 Press the
(Set) button. Execute the operation again according to the operation procedure. Contact Dell if
this message appears repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on page 360.
031-598 Press the
(Set) button. Check append access right to the file and if server supports FTP append
command.
033-503 Press the
(Set) button to clear the message.
033-513 Press the
(Set) button. Print the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.
033-517 Press the
(Set) button. Check if password is correct.
033-518 Press the
(Set) button. Check if your country code is set correctly.
033-519 Press the
(Set) button to clear the message.
033-787
033-788 Press the
(Set) button. Remove the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed. Press
the
(Set) button to clear the message.
034-700 Press the
(Set) button to clear the message. Check that the phone line is connected properly. See
"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 43.
034-701
034-702
Error-Code What you can do
298 Understanding Printer Messages
034-703 Press the
(Set) button to clear the message. Check that the phone line is connected properly. See
"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 43.
034-704
034-705
034-706
034-707
034-708
034-709
034-710
034-711
034-712
034-713
034-714
034-715
034-716
034-717
034-718
034-719
034-720
034-721
034-722
034-723
034-724
034-725
034-726
034-727
034-750
034-751
034-752
034-753
034-754
034-755
034-756
034-757
034-758
034-759
034-760
034-761
034-762
034-763
034-764
034-765
Error-Code What you can do
Understanding Printer Messages 299
034-766
034-767
034-768
062-321 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.
062-790 Press the
(Set) button.
075-100 Check and clear the paper path, load the specified paper, and then press the
(Set) button. See "Clearing
Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer" on page 329.
075-921 Load paper for the second side (odd) pages, and press the
(Set) button. See Figure "Loading Print Media
When Manual Duplex Printing" on page 224.
077-100 Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 323.
077-101
077-102 Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer" on page 330.
077-104 Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 323.
077-105
077-300 Close the rear cover.
077-900 Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray" on page 332.
077-901 Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 323.
091-402 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.
092-310 Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor" on page 316.
093-423 Replace the specified toner cartridge soon. Order a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 310.093-424
093-425
093-426
093-919 Re-install or replace the specified toner cartridge. See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 310.
093-920
093-921
093-922
093-930 Remove the specified toner cartridge and install a new one. If you do not replace the toner cartridge, print
quality problems may occur. Order a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 310.
093-931
093-932
093-933
093-960 Replace the specified toner cartridge with the supported one. Order a new consumable from
www.dell.com/supplies.
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 310.
093-961
093-962
093-963
093-970 Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner Cartridge" on page 312.
093-971
093-972
093-973
Error-Code What you can do
300 Understanding Printer Messages
117-331 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.
117-332
117-333
117-334
117-340
117-342
117-343
117-344
117-346
117-348
117-349
117-350
117-351
117-366
124-333 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.
134-211
191-310
193-700 This message indicates the printer is in the non-Dell toner mode.
Error-Code What you can do
Specifications 301
24
Specifications
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
Operating System Compatibility
Your Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer is compatible with Microsoft® Windows® XP,
Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit
Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition,
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012,
Mac OS X Version 10.4.11, 10.5, 10.6, and 10.7.
Power Supply
Dimensions
Height: 338 mm (13.31 inches) Width: 410 mm (16.14 inches) Depth: 379 mm (14.92 inches)
Weight (only the toner cartridges are included):
• Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer: 14.8 kg (32.63 lb)
• Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer: 14.9 kg (32.85 lb)
Memory
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and
Interface
Rated Voltage 220-240 VAC 110-127 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Current 5.0 A 11.0 A
Base memory 128 MB
PDL/Emulations Host-based printing system
OSes Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit
Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition,
Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012,
Mac OS X Version 10.4.11, 10.5, 10.6, and 10.7.
Interfaces Standard local:
Standard network:
USB 2.0
10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g (Wireless)
(Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction
Printer only)
302 Specifications
MIB Compatibility
A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information about network devices (such as
adapters, bridges, routers, or computers). This information helps network administrators manage the network
(analyze performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer complies with
standard industry MIB specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various printer and
network management software systems.
Environment
Operation
Print Quality Guarantee
Storage
Altitude
NOTE: For more information on adjusting the altitude, see "Adjust Altitude" on page 151.
Temperature
10-32°
C
Relative humidity 10-85% RH (no condensation)
Temperature 15
-
28
°
C
Relative humidity 20-70% RH (no condensation)
Temperature range -20-40°C
Storage humidity range 5-80% RH (no condensation)
Operating Up to 3,100 m (10,000 feet)
Storage 70.9275 Kpa
Specifications 303
Cables
Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:
Connection type Connection specifications and symbols
1Ethernet 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX
2USB USB 2.0
3Wall Jack Connector
4Phone Connector
1
2
3
4
304 Specifications
Copy Specifications
Scanner Specifications
Item Description
Copy Resolution Optical: 600x600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch),
ADF: 600x300 dots/25.4mm (1 inch)
(Same for Color/Black&White)
Copy Speed Color 12 cpm or more, Black&White 15 cpm or more (When using the document glass to
make sequential copies of a document with pages scanned one by one.)
Color 2.87 cpm or more, Black&White 10.64 cpm or more (When using the ADF to make
sequential copies of multiple documents.)
Paper Size A4, A5, B5, Executive, Letter, Folio, Legal, Monarch, DL, C5, Envelope #10
Zoom Rate Document glass: 25% - 400%, ADF: 25% - 400%
Multiple copies 1 - 99 pages
Copy mode (=Original Type) Text, Text & Photo, Photo
Scanning method Platen: Document-fixed flatbed scanning method
ADF: Carriage-fixed, document-feeding scanning method (one side scanning)
Item Description
Compatibility Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN), Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)
Scan Resolution TWAIN: 75 x 75 to 4800 x 4800 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
WIA: 75/100/150/200/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mm
(1 inch)
Resolutions other than the following are achieved by driver's resolution conversion:
200 x 200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
300 x 300 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch) (Default)
600 x 600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
1200 x 1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
Color bit depth 24 bit (WIA, TWAIN)
Mono bit depth 1 bit for Line art and 8 bit for Gray scale
Effective scanning length Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches),
ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Effective scanning width 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Scan speed (Text mode) Black&White:
641.22 μsec/line (600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)),
1265.19 μsec/line (1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch))
Color:
2176.52 μsec/line (600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)),
4363.36 μsec/line (1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch))
Specifications 305
Facsimile Specifications
Item Description
Compatibility ITU-T Group 3
Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Data coding Black&White: 1bit, JBIG, MMR, MR, MH encoding
Color: Not supported
Max modem speed 33.6 Kbps
Transmission speed Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to memory transmission of text data
scanned in Standard resolution with ECM using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.
Scanning speed Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax resolution mode) ADF: approx. 5
seconds/Letter (at standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at fine fax resolution
mode)
Maximum document length Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches),
ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Paper size Letter, A4, Legal
Resolution Standard: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 3.85 lines/mm (98 lines/inch)
200 dpi x 100 dpi
Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 7.7 lines/mm (196 lines/inch)
200 dpi x 200 dpi
Super Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 15.4 lines/mm (391 lines/inch)
200 dpi x 400 dpi
Ultra Fine: 16 pels/mm (406 pels/inch) x 15.4 lines/mm (391 lines/inch)
400 dpi x 400 dpi
User Memory 2 MB
Halftone 256 levels
306 Specifications
307
Maintaining Your Printer
25 Maintaining Your Printer.......................................................... 309
26 Clearing Jams............................................................................ 323
308
Maintaining Your Printer 309
25
Maintaining Your Printer
Periodically, your printer requires you to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality. If several people
are using the printer, you may want to designate a key operator to maintain your printer. Refer printing problems and
maintenance tasks to this key operator.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
Determining the Status of Supplies
If your printer is connected to the network, the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool can provide instant feedback
on remaining toner levels. Type the printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. To use
the E-Mail Alert feature that notifies you when the printer requires new supplies, type your name or the name of the
key operator in the e-mail list box.
On the operator panel, you can also confirm the following:
• Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing (However, the printer can only display
information about one item at a time.)
• Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge
Conserving Supplies
You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner cartridge and paper.
Storing Print Media
To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are several things you can do.
• To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an environment where the temperature is
approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%.
• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so
the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Supply Setting Function
Toner cartridge Toner Sa ving Mode in the Graphics
tab of the printer driver
This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses less
toner. When this feature is used, the image quality will be lower
than when it is not used.
Print media Multiple Up in the Layout tab of
the printer driver
The printer prints two or more pages on one side of a sheet. The
available numbers that each printer driver can print one sheet of
paper are as follows:
• Printer driver for Microsoft
®
Windows
®
: 2, 4, 8, or 16 pages
• Printer driver for Macintosh: 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages
Combined with the duplex setting, Multiple Up allows you to
print up to 32 pages on one sheet of paper. (16 images on the front
and 16 on the back)
310 Maintaining Your Printer
Storing Consumables
Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do not store consumables in:
• Temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F).
• An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
• Direct sunlight.
• Dusty places.
• A car for a long period of time.
• An environment where corrosive gases are present.
• An environment with salty air.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
WARNING: Before replacing toner cartridges, read and follow the safety instructions in the
Important Information
.
Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order more cartridges online at
http://www.dell.com/supplies or by phone. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" on page 360.
It is recommended that you use Dell toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for
problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
WARNING: Never throw used toner cartridges into fire. The residual toner could explode resulting in burns and injuries.
WARNING: Do not shake the used toner cartridge to avoid spilling of toner.
Removing the Toner Cartridges
1
Open the toner access cover.
Maintaining Your Printer 311
2
Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.
WARNING: Always pull the cartridge out slowly so you do not spill any toner.
3
Pull the toner cartridge out.
312 Maintaining Your Printer
Installing a Toner Cartridge
1
Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color and shake it five to six times to distribute the toner evenly.
NOTE: Ensure that the color of the new toner cartridge matches that on the handle before replacing it.
NOTE: Handle the toner cartridge carefully to avoid spillage of the toner.
2
Remove the tape from the toner cartridge.
3
Adjust the toner cartridge to the associated cartridge holder, and then insert it firmly by pressing near the center of
the label until the cartridge clicks.
Maintaining Your Printer 313
4
Close the toner access cover.
Cleaning Inside the Printer
WARNING: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet
before performing maintenance.
1
Confirm that the printer is not in operation, and open the toner access cover.
314 Maintaining Your Printer
2
Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.
3
Pull the toner cartridge out.
4
Pull the other three cartridges out as well.
5
Pull the cleaning rod out.
Maintaining Your Printer 315
6
Insert the cleaning rod fully into the hole beside the arrow on the printer until its tip reaches the interior of the
printer as illustrated below, and then pull it out.
7
Repeat the same procedure for the other three holes.
8
Insert the cleaning rod back to its original location.
9
Replace the black cartridge by adjusting it to the associated cartridge holder, and then insert it firmly by pressing
near the center of the label until the cartridge clicks.
316 Maintaining Your Printer
10
Replace the other three cartridges as well.
11
Close the toner access cover.
Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor
Clean the CTD sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the Status Monitor or operator panel.
1
Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2
Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.
Maintaining Your Printer 317
3
Clean the CTD sensor inside the printer with a clean dry cotton swab.
4
Close the rear cover.
5
Turn on the printer.
Adjusting Color Registration
This section describes how to adjust the color registration when you first install the printer or after moving it to a
new location.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
Performing Auto Adjust
Auto Adjust allows you to correct the color registration automatically.
The Operator Panel
1
Press the
(Menu)
button.
2
Press the button until
System
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
3
Press the button until
Admin Menu
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
4
Press the button until
Maintenance
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
5
Press the button until
Adjust ColorRegi
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
6
Ensure that
Auto Adjust
is highlighted, and then press the
(Set)
button.
318 Maintaining Your Printer
7
Ensure that
Are You Sure?
is displayed, press the button to select
Yes
, and then press the
(Set)
button.
Auto adjust is performed.
The Tool Box
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Tool Box
.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and
then click OK.
The
Tool Box
opens.
2
Click the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
3
Select
Registration Adjustment
from the list at the left side of the page.
The registration adjustment page is displayed.
4
Clear the
On
check box for
Auto Registration Adjustment
.
5
Click
Start
next to
Auto Correct
.
The color registration is corrected automatically.
Printing the Color Registration Chart
The Tool Box
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Tool Box
.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and
then click OK.
The
Tool Box
opens.
2
Click the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
3
Select
Registration Adjustment
from the list at the left side of the page.
The registration adjustment page is displayed.
4
Clear the
On
check box for
Auto Registration Adjustment
.
5
Click
Start
next to
Print
Color Regi Chart
.
The color registration chart is printed.
Determining Values
On the color registration chart printed, find the straightest lines where the two black lines and the colored line are
most closely aligned for each color (Y, M, and C).
If you find the straightest line, make a note of the value (-5 - +5) indicated by the straightest line for each color.
When the value is 0 for each color, you do not need to adjust the color registration.
When the value is not 0, enter the value according to the procedure in "Entering Values" on page 319.
Maintaining Your Printer 319
Entering Values
The Tool Box
Using the Tool Box, enter the values that you found in the color registration chart to make adjustments.
1
Click
Start
→
All Programs
→
Dell Printers
→
Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer
→
Tool Box
.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and
then click OK.
The
Tool Box
opens.
2
Click the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
3
Select
Registration Adjustment
from the list at the left side of the page.
The registration adjustment page is displayed.
4
Clear the
On
check box for
Auto Registration Adjustment
.
5
Select the value with the straight line, and then click
Apply New Settings
.
6
Click
Start
next to
Print Color Regi Chart
.
The color registration chart is printed with the new values.
7
Adjust the values for every color until the lines at 0 are the straightest. If a line is not the straightest at 0, determine
the value and adjust the printer again.
CAUTION: After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the printer until the printer motor has stopped running.
320 Maintaining Your Printer
Cleaning the Scanner
Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the scanner at the start
of each day and during the day, as needed.
1
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2
Open the document cover.
3
Wipe the surface of the document glass and ADF glass until it is clean and dry.
1White Strip
2White Document Cover
3Document Glass
4ADF Glass
1
3
4
2
Maintaining Your Printer 321
4
Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until they are clean and dry.
5
Close the document cover.
322 Maintaining Your Printer
Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller
Keeping the ADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the ADF feed roller
at regular intervals.
1
Open the ADF cover.
2
Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until it is clean.
If the ADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains, paper from the ADF may also be soiled. In this case, slightly
dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with a neutral detergent or water, and then remove the contamination
from the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry.
Clearing Jams 323
26
Clearing Jams
Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid most jams. See "Print Media
Guidelines" on page 203 for more information.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
NOTE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.
Avoiding Jams
• Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines" on page 203 for more information.
• See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211 and "Loading Print Media in the
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219 to load print media properly.
• Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure that the stack print media height does not exceed the maximum
height indicated by the line with an arrow on each width guide.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.
• Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs with print media, try feeding one sheet at a
time through the MPF or the PSI.
• Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media source.
• Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you insert the print media.
• Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more information, see "Storing Print Media" on
page 207.
• Do not remove the PSI during a print job.
• Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
324 Clearing Jams
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
WARNING: Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may permanently damage the printer.
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path.
1Scanner Unit
2Fusing Unit
3Levers
4Rear Cover
5ADF Cover
6Front Cover
7Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
123
7 6 5
4
Clearing Jams 325
Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF
When a document jams while it passes through the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), remove jams in the
following procedure.
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the
Important
Information
.
WARNING: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet
before performing maintenance.
WARNING: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during
use.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
1
Open the ADF cover.
2
Remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it in the direction of the arrow shown in the following
illustration.
326 Clearing Jams
3
If you find it difficult to pull the document, open the document feeder tray.
4
Remove the jammed document from the document output tray.
5
Close the document feeder tray.
Clearing Jams 327
6
Close the ADF cover, and then load the documents back into the ADF.
NOTE: Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a Legal-size document.
7
If you cannot remove the jammed document from the document output tray or cannot find any jammed
document there, open the document output tray.
328 Clearing Jams
8
Remove the document from the ADF feed roller or the feed area by carefully pulling the document in the direction
of the arrow shown in the following illustration.
Clearing Jams 329
Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the
Important
Information
.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
1
Pull the PSI out.
2
Remove any jammed paper from the front of the printer.
330 Clearing Jams
3
Replace the PSI in the printer.
WARNING: When putting the PSI back into the printer, do not use excessive force. Doing so could damage the PSI or
the inside of the printer.
4
Press the
(Set)
button.
Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the
Important
Information
.
WARNING: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet
before performing maintenance.
WARNING: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during
use.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
1
Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.
Clearing Jams 331
2
Lift up the levers.
3
Remove any jammed paper from the back of the printer.
4
Lower the levers to their original position.
332 Clearing Jams
5
Close the rear cover.
Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the
Important
Information
.
WARNING: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet
before performing maintenance.
WARNING: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during
use.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
1
Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.
Clearing Jams 333
2
Lift up the levers.
3
Remove any jammed paper from the back of the printer. If no paper is found in the paper path, face the front of
the printer and check the output tray.
4
Lift and open the scanner unit.
334 Clearing Jams
5
Remove any jammed paper out of the output tray.
6
Lower and close the scanner unit.
7
Lower the levers to their original position.
Clearing Jams 335
8
Close the rear cover.
336 Clearing Jams
337
Troubleshooting
27 Troubleshooting......................................................................... 339
338
Troubleshooting 339
27
Troubleshooting
Basic Printer Problems
Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs with your printer, check each of the following:
• The power cable is connected to the printer, and to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
• The printer is turned on.
• The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
• When your printer is connected to the network with the Ethernet cable, the USB cable is not connected between
the printer and the computer.
• When your printer is connected to the computer with the USB cable, the Ethernet cable is not connected between
the printer and the network.
If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn
on the printer. This often fixes the problem.
NOTE: If error messages are displayed on the operator panel or on your computer screen, follow the on-screen instructions to
resolve the printer problems. For details about error messages and error codes, see "Understanding Printer Messages" on
page 295.
Display Problems
Printing Problems
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and press the (Set) button.
Problem Action
Menu settings changed from the operator
panel have no effect.
Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the printer utilities have
precedence over the settings made on the operator panel.
Change the menu settings from the printer driver, the printer utilities, or the
software program instead of the operator panel.
Problem Action
Job did not print or incorrect characters
printed.
Ensure that Ready appears on the operator panel before you send a job to print.
Ensure that print media is loaded in the printer.
Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.
Ensure that you are using the correct Ethernet or USB cable and that it is securely
connected to the printer.
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
If you are using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.
340 Troubleshooting
Check the interface of your printer from the Admin Menu.
Determine the host interface you are using. Print a panel settings page to verify
that the current interface settings are correct. Refer to "Printing a Report/List
Using the Operator Panel" on page 175 for details on how to print a panel settings
page.
Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds
occur.
Ensure that the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer.
See "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 208 for more information.
Fan the print media before loading it.
Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly.
Ensure that the width and length guides are adjusted correctly.
Ensure that the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) is securely inserted.
Do not overfill the print media sources.
Do not force print media into the PSI or the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) when
you load it. Otherwise, it may skew or buckle.
Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Load the recommended print side correctly for the type of print media you are
using. See "Loading Print Media" on page 211 for more information.
Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding
improves.
Do not mix print media types.
Do not mix reams of print media.
Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print
media.
Load a print media source only when it is empty.
The envelope is creased after printing. Ensure that the envelope is loaded as instructed in "Loading an Envelope in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 216 or "Loading an Envelope in the Priority
Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 221.
Page breaks in unexpected places. Increase the setting for Time-Out in the Printer Settings menu in the
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Print media does not stack neatly in the
output tray.
Turn the print media stack over in the PSI and MPF.
Printer does not duplex pages. Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from the Duplex menu on the
Paper/Output tab in the printer driver.
Problem Action
Troubleshooting 341
Print Quality Problems
NOTE: In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool,
see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 163 and "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 97.
The output is too light
Action Yes No
1The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the
amount of toner in each toner cartridge.
a
Check the toner level in the
Status
tab in the Status Monitor.
b
Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 2.
2Verify that the print media is not damp and the correct print media is
used. See "Supported Paper Types" on page 209. If not, use the print
media recommended for the printer.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3.
3Verify that the Paper Type setting in the printer driver matches the print
media you loaded.
a
On the
Paper/Output
tab in
Printing Preferences
of the printer
driver, check the
Paper Type
setting.
b
Load dry (not damp) and corrected print media, and then click
Print
Test Page
in
Printer properties
of the printer driver.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 4.
4Disable the Toner Saving Mode in the printer driver.
a
On the
Graphics
tab in
Printing Preferences
of the printer driver,
ensure that the
Toner Saving Mode
check box is not selected.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
342 Troubleshooting
Toner smears or print comes off/Stain on back side
Action Yes No
1The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type
setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to
thick.
a
On the
Paper/Output tab in Printing Preferences of the printer
driver, change the Paper Type setting.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 2.
2Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper
Types" on page 209. If not, use the print media recommended for the
printer.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3.
3Adjust the fusing unit temperature.
a
Launch the
Tool Bo x
, and click
Adjust Fusing Unit
on the
Printer
Maintenance
tab.
b
Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up the value for your
printing media.
c
Click
Apply New Settings
.
d
Click close box to exit
Tool Box
.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Troubleshooting 343
Random spots/Blurred images
The entire output is blank
If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.
Streaks appear on the output
If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.
Action Yes No
1Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed correctly. See
"Installing a
Toner Cartridge" on page 312.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 2.
2If you use non-Dell brand toner cartridges, install Dell brand toner
cartridges.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3.
3Clean up the fusing unit.
a
Load one sheet of paper on the MPF, and then print a solid image all
over paper.
b
Load the printed sheet with the side to be printed on facing down,
and then print a blank sheet of paper.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
344 Troubleshooting
Pitched color dots
If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.
Vertical blanks
Mottle
Action Yes No
1Clean inside the printer and performing test print.
a
Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod. See "Cleaning
Inside the Printer" on page 313.
b
Click
Print Test Page
in
Printer properties
of the printer driver.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Action Yes No
1Adjust the transfer bias.
a
Launch the
Tool Bo x
, click
Adjust Transfer Roller
on the
Printer
Maintenance
tab.
b
Adjust the setting for the type of print media being used.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 2.
2If you use non-recommended print media, use the print media
recommended for the printer.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Troubleshooting 345
Ghosting
Action Yes No
1Adjust the transfer bias.
a
Launch the
Tool Bo x
, and click
Chart Print
on the
Diagnosis
tab.
b
Click
Ghost Configuration Chart
.
The ghost configuration chart is printed.
c
Launch the
Tool Box
, and click
Transfer Roller Refresh Mode
on the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
d
Check the check box next to
On
, and then click
Apply New Settings
.
e
Click
Chart Print
on the
Diagnosis
tab.
f
Click
Ghost Configuration Chart
.
The ghost configuration chart is printed.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 2.
2The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type
setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to
thick.
a
On the
Paper/Output
tab in
Printing Preferences
of the printer
driver, change the
Paper Type
setting.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3.
3Adjust the fusing unit temperature.
a
Launch the
Tool Bo x
, and click
Adjust Fusing Unit
on the
Printer
Maintenance
tab.
b
Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up the value for your
printing media.
c
Click
Apply New Settings
.
d
Click close box to exit
Tool Box
.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 4.
4If you use non-recommended print media, use the print media
recommended for the printer.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
346 Troubleshooting
Fog
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)
Action Yes No
1Is the whole page printed light? Contact Dell. Go to action 2.
2Start Clean Developer.
a
Launch the
Tool Bo x
, and click
Clean
Developer
on the
Diagnosis
tab.
b
Click
Start
.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Action Yes No
1If the printer is installed in a high altitude location, set the altitude of
the location.
a
Launch the
Tool Bo x
, and click
Adjust Altitude
on the
Printer
Maintenance
tab.
b
Select the value close to the altitude of the location where the printer
is installed.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Troubleshooting 347
Auger mark
Wrinkled/Stained paper
Action Yes No
1The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the
amount of toner in each toner cartridge.
a
Check the toner level in the
Status
tab in the Status Monitor.
b
Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 2.
2Start Clean Developer.
a
Launch the
Tool Bo x
, and click
Clean
Developer
on the
Diagnosis
tab.
b
Click
Start
.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Action Yes No
1Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper
Sizes" on page 208 and "Print Media Guidelines" on page 203. If not, use
the print media recommended for the printer.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. If printing on an
envelope, go to action
2.
If printing on print
media other than
envelopes, contact Dell.
2
Check the crease. Is the crease within 30 mm of the four edges of the
envelope?
This type of crease is
considered normal.
Your printer is not at
fault.
If the envelope is 220
mm or longer (C5 or
Envelope #10), go to
action 3a.
If the envelope is
shorter than 220 mm
(Monarch or DL), go to
action 3b.
348 Troubleshooting
The top margins is incorrect
3a
Does the envelope have a flap on the long edge?
The envelope is
Envelope #10.
Go to action 4b.
The envelope is C5.
Go to action 4a.
3b Load the envelope long edge feed in the MPF with the flap open and
facing up. For details, see "When Loading Envelope #10, DL, or
Monarch" on page 216.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 4b.
4a Load the envelope in the MPF with the flap open and facing up. For
details, see "When Loading C5" on page 217.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
4b Use a different size envelope.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Action Yes No
1Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the application being used.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Action Yes No
Troubleshooting 349
Color registration is out of alignment
Action Yes No
1Execute auto color registration adjustment.
a
Launch the
Tool Bo x
, and click
Registration Adjustment
on the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
b
Clear the
On
check box for
Auto Registration Adjustment
.
c
Click
Start
next to
Auto Correct
.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 2.
2Clean the CTD sensor.
a
Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the Color Toner Density
(CTD) Sensor" on page 316.
b
Launch the
Tool Bo x
, and click
Registration Adjustment
on the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
c
Clear the
On
check box for
Auto Registration Adjustment
.
d
Click
Start
next to
Auto Correct
.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3.
3Print the color registration chart and manually correct the color
registration.
a
Click
Registration Adjustment
on the
Printer Maintenance
tab.
b
Clear the
On
check box for
Auto Registration Adjustment
.
c
Click
Start
next to
Print Color Regi Chart
.
The color registration chart is printed.
d
Select the value with the straight line. See "Adjusting Color
Registration" on page 317 for details.
e
Click
Apply New Settings
.
f
Click
Start
next to
Print Color Regi Chart
to print the color
registration chart again.
g
Adjust the values for every color until the lines at 0 are the straightest.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
350 Troubleshooting
Protrudent / Bumpy paper
Jam
NOTE: In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool,
see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 163 and "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 97.
Misfeed jam
Action Yes No
1Clean up the fusing unit.
a
Load one sheet of paper on the MPF, and then print a solid image all
over paper.
b
Load the printed sheet with the side to be printed on facing down,
and then print a blank sheet of paper.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Action Yes No
1 Remove the paper from the PSI, and then ensure that papers are
properly inserted on the MPF.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Proceed to the action
corresponding to the
type of the print media
being used:
•Thick - 2a
• Thin - 2b
• Envelope - 2c
If performing manual
duplex printing, go to
action 2d.
If using paper other
than the above or if not
performing duplex
printing, go to action
2e.
2a Use thick paper that is 216 gsm or less.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3a.
2b Use thin paper that is 60 gsm or more.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3a.
Troubleshooting 351
Multi-feed jam
A document jam occurs in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) if scanning of multiple-sheet document is
cancelled while scanning is in progress.
2c Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the MPF as instructed in
"Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 216.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3b.
2d Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3a.
2e Is the print media damp? Go to action 3c. Go to action 3a.
3a Fan the print media.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3c.
If you are performing
manual duplex printing
or if using an envelope,
contact Dell.
3b If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use another envelope.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3a.
3c Turn over the print media.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 4.
4 Use print media that is not damp.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Action Yes No
1 Remove the paper from the PSI, and then ensure that papers are
inserted properly in the MPF.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 2.
2 Is the print media damp? Go to action 3a. Go to action 3b.
3a Use print media that is not damp.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Go to action 3b.
3b Fan the print media.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Action Yes No
1 Clear the jam. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF" on page 325.
Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete. Contact Dell.
Action Yes No
352 Troubleshooting
Copy Problem
Fax Problems
Problem Action
A document loaded in the ADF cannot be
copied.
Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.
Problem Action
The printer is not working, there is no
display and the buttons are not working.
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.
No dial tone sounds. Check that the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone
Line" on page 43.
Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored in the memory do not
dial correctly.
Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory correctly.
Print a Address Book list.
The document does not feed into the
printer.
Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly.
Check that the document is of the right size, not too thick or thin.
Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.
Faxes are not received automatically. The FAX mode should be selected.
Ensure that there is paper in the PSI or MPF.
Check to see if the display shows Memory Full.
Check the Junk Fax Setup setting.
The printer does not send faxes. Sending should show up on the display.
Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank spaces or is
received in poor-quality.
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
Check your printer by making a copy.
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner cartridge. For details, see
"Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 310.
Some of the words on an incoming fax are
stretched.
The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam.
There are lines on the documents you send. Check your scan glass for marks and clean it. See "Cleaning the Scanner" on
page 320.
The printer dials a number, but the
connection with another fax machine fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming
calls. Speak with the other machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the
problem.
Documents are not stored in the memory. There may not be enough memory to store the document. If the display shows a
Memory Full message, delete any documents you no longer need from the
memory and then restore the document, or wait for the job in progress (e.g., a fax
transmission or reception) to complete.
Troubleshooting 353
Scanning Problems
Blank areas appear at the bottom of each
page or on other pages, with a small strip of
text at the top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. See
"Print Media Guidelines" on page 203.
The printer will not send or receive faxes. Ensure that the country code is set correctly under (Menu) → System
→Admin Menu → Fax Settings → Country.
Check that the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone
Line" on page 43.
An error often occurs during a fax
transmission or reception.
Reduce the modem speed under (Menu) → System → Admin Menu →
Fax Settings → Modem Speed.
Problem Action
The scanner does not work. Ensure that you place the document to be scanned face down from the document
glass, or face up in the ADF.
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to
scan. Try the preview function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution
rate.
Check that the Ethernet or USB cable is connected properly.
Ensure that the Ethernet or USB cable is not defective. Switch the cable with a
known good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check the application you want to
use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.
The printer scans very slowly. Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when using the Scan to E-mail or Scan
to Network feature.
Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount of
memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image.
Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at a low
resolution.
Document misfeeds or multiple feeds occur
in the ADF.
Ensure that the document’s paper type meets the specifications for the printer. See
"Supported Paper Types" on page 209 for more information.
Check whether the document is properly loaded in the ADF.
Ensure that the document guides are adjusted properly.
Ensure that the number of document sheets do not exceed the maximum capacity
of the ADF.
Ensure that the document is not curled.
Fan the document well before loading it in the ADF.
Vertical stripes appear on the output when
scanned using the ADF.
Clean the ADF glass.
See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 320.
A smear appears at the same location on the
output when scanned using the document
glass.
Clean the document glass.
See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 320.
Images are skewed. Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the ADF or on the document glass.
Diagonal lines appear jagged when scanned
using the ADF.
If the document uses thick media, try scanning it from the document glass.
Problem Action
354 Troubleshooting
The printer does not properly transfer scan
data to a specified destination via the Scan
to E-mail or Scan to Network feature.
Check if the following settings have been set correctly on the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Scan to Network
Check the following settings under Address Book → Server Address:
• Server Address
•Share Name
•Server Path
•Login Name
• Login Password
Scan to E-mail
Check the following setting under Address Book → Fax/E-Mail:
•E-Mail Address
Cannot scan using Windows Image
Acquisition (WIA) on a Microsoft®
Windows Server® 2003 computer.
Enable WIA on the computer.
To enabl e WIA:
1
Click
Start
, point to
Administrative Tools
, and then click
Services
.
2
Right-click
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)
, and then click
Start
.
Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server
2008 R2 computer.
Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.
To install Desktop Experience:
1
Click
Start
, point to
Administrative Tools
, and then click
Server Manager
.
2
Under
Features Summary
, click
Add Features
.
3
Select the
Desktop Experience
check box, click
Next
, and then click
Install
.
4
Restart the computer.
Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a
Windows Server 2012 computer.
Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.
To install Desktop Experience:
1
Click
Server Manager
from the
Start
screen.
The
Server Manager
screen appears.
2
Under
Manage
, click
Add Roles and Features
.
Add Roles and Features Wizard
appears.
3
Click
Next
to skip the
Before you begin
page.
4
Ensure that
Role-based or feature-based installation
is selected, and then click
Next
.
5
Ensure that
Select a server from the server pool
is selected, select the server under
Server Pool
, and then click
Next
.
6
Click
Next
to skip the
Select server roles
page.
7
Select the
Desktop Experience
check box under
User Interfaces and
Infrastructure
, and then click
Next
.
8
Click
Confirmation
from the list on the left.
9
Select the
Restart the destination server automatically if required
check box, and
then click
Install
.
10
Restart the computer.
Problem Action
Troubleshooting 355
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems
Problem Action
Unable to retrieve the Address Book data
from the printer on the Address Book
Editor.
Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the
Ethernet or USB cable.
Ensure that the printer’s power is on.
Ensure that the printer driver is installed on your computer.
(The Address Book Editor retrieves the Address Book data via the printer driver.)
The TWAIN driver cannot connect to the
printer.
Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the
Ethernet or USB cable.
Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on, reboot it by turning the power
switch off and then on again.
If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application,
and then try scanning again.
The scanner driver has not been registered
on your computer and cannot be accessed
from ScanButton Manager.
Install the scanner driver. If the driver is installed, uninstall it and then reinstall it.
Failed to scan your document on the printer
via ScanButton Manager.
Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB
cable.
Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on, reboot it by turning the power
switch off and then on again.
If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application,
and then try scanning again.
Failed to create an image file via
ScanButton Manager.
Ensure that there is sufficient space in your hard disk.
Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.
Failed to initialize ScanButton Manager. Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.
Failed to execute ScanButton Manager. Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.
An unexpected error occurred on
ScanButton Manager.
Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.
356 Troubleshooting
Wireless Problems (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
Other Problems
Contacting Service
When you call for printer service, be prepared to describe the problem you are experiencing or the error message on
the display.
You need to know the model of your printer type and serial number. See the label located inside the side door of your
printer.
Problem Action
Cannot setup wireless connection. Ensure that the Ethernet and USB cable are disconnected from the printer.
Ensure that Wi-Fi is set to On. See "Wi-Fi (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction
Printer only)" on page 180.
Try disabling the firewall on your computer. The firewall on your computer may be
blocking communication with your printer.
Cannot setup wireless connection with WPS
(Wi-Fi Protected Setup
®
).
Ensure that the security setting of the wireless LAN access point or router is WPA
or WPA2. (WEP is not supported on WPS.)
Cannot setup wireless connection with the
WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push
Button Configuration).
Press the WPS button on the wireless LAN access point or router within 2 minutes
after starting the WPS operation on the printer. For details about the wireless LAN
access point or router, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access
point or router.
Cannot setup wireless connection with
WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal
Identification Number).
Check if the PIN you have entered on the computer is correct.
Problem Action
Condensation has occurred inside the
printer.
This usually occurs within several hours after you heat the room in winter. This
also occurs when the printer is operating in a location where relative humidity
reaches 85% or more. Adjust the humidity or relocate the printer to an appropriate
environment.
No file is displayed on the operator panel
when you are selecting a file for Printing
from USB Memory feature.
Confirm that there are files with the supported file formats (PDF, TIFF, or JPEG)
in the USB storage device.
If the target file is in a deep hierarchy in the USB storage device, move the file to
the root directory in the USB storage device with your computer.
Shorten the target file name in the USB storage device with your computer, and try
printing again.
357
Appendix
Appendix..................................................................................... 359
Index............................................................................................ 365
358
Appendix 359
Appendix
Dell Technical Support Policy
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the
troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system, software program and hardware drivers
to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of
the printer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical
support is available at Dell Support. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for
third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or
installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
Online Services
You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites:
www.dell.com
www.dell.com/ap
(Asian/Pacific countries only)
www.dell.com/jp
(Japan only)
www.euro.dell.com
(Europe only)
www.dell.com/la
(Latin American and Caribbean countries)
www.dell.ca
(Canada only)
You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail addresses:
• Dell Support websites
support.dell.com
support.euro.dell.com
(Europe only)
• Dell Support e-mail addresses
mobile_support@us.dell.com
support@us.dell.com
la-techsupport@dell.com (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)
apsupport@dell.com
(Asian/Pacific countries only)
• Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses
apmarketing@dell.com
(Asian/Pacific countries only)
sales_canada@dell.com (Canada only)
• Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
ftp.dell.com
Log in as user:
anonymous
, and use your e-mail address as your password.
360 Appendix
Warranty and Return Policy
Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or
equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your
printer, see support.dell.com.
Recycling Information
It is recommended that customers dispose of their used computer hardware, monitors, printers, and other peripherals in an environmentally
sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products, components, and/or materials.
For specific information on Dell's worldwide recycling programs, see www.dell.com/ recyclingworldwide.
Contacting Dell
You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page,
and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information.
You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:
•World Wide Web
www.dell.com
www.dell.com/ap
(Asian/Pacific countries only)
www.dell.com/jp
(Japan only)
www.euro.dell.com
(Europe only)
www.dell.com/la
(Latin American and Caribbean countries)
www.dell.ca
(Canada only)
• Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
ftp.dell.com
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password.
• Electronic Support Service
mobile_support@us.dell.com
support@us.dell.com
la-techsupport@dell.com (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)
apsupport@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)
support.jp.dell.com (Japan only)
support.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
• Electronic Quote Service
apmarketing@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)
sales_canada@dell.com (Canada only)
Appendix 361
New Zealand PTC200 Warnings
General warning
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the
item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product
by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work
correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it
imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services Warnings taken from Specification text
2.11.1 Compliance testing (6) & (7) (Functional tests)
"This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it
is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances"
4.5.1 Off-hook line impedance
(4) "This equipment does not fully meet Telecom's impedance requirements. Performance limitations may occur
when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties
arise in such circumstances"
4.9.3 Non-voice equipment
(4) "This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct at the higher speeds for which it is
designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances"
5.6.1 General requirements (automatic dialling devices)
(3) "This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom '111' Emergency Service
5.5.5 User instructions
(4) If a charge for local calls is unacceptable, the 'Dial' button should NOT be used for local calls. Only the 7-digits of
the local number should be dialled from your telephone. DO NOT dial the area code digit or the '0' prefix
8.1.7 User Instructions (automatic call set-up)
(b) This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom '111' Emergency Service
8.2.1(b) Call answering
When this equipment is set up call answering not within 3~30 sec., the telephone or answering machine shall
answer incoming call with 3~30sec.
362 Appendix
USA/Canada Wi-Fi Warnings
Class B:
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician for help.
CAUTION:
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the grantee of this device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Labeling requirements
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
RF exposure warning
This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with provided instructions and the antenna(s) used
for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not
be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be
provide with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
compliance.
Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 and RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Appendix 363
Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information
The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada (IC) radio frequency exposure
limits. The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during
normal operation is minimized.
This device has also been evaluated and shown compliant with the IC RF Exposure limits under mobile exposure
conditions. (antennas are greater than 20cm from a person's body).
This device has been certified for use in Canada. Status of the listing in the Industry
Canada's REL (Radio Equipment List) can be found at the following web address:
http://www.ic.gc.ca/app/sitt/reltel/srch/nwRdSrch.do?lang=eng
Additional Canadian information on RF exposure also can be found at the following web address:
http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf08792.html
Canada, avis d'Industry Canada (IC)
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux normes canadiennes ICES-003 et RSS-210.
Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférence et
(2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence, notamment les interférences qui peuvent affecter son
fonctionnement.
Informations concernant l'exposition aux fréquences radio (RF)
La puissance de sortie émise par l'appareil de sans fil Dell est inférieure à la limite d'exposition aux fréquences radio
d'Industry Canada (IC). Utilisez l'appareil de sans fil Dell de façon à minimiser les contacts humains lors du
fonctionnement normal.
Ce périphérique a également été évalué et démontré conforme aux limites d'exposition aux RF d'IC dans des
conditions d'exposition à des appareils mobiles (les antennes se situent à moins de 20 cm du corps d'une
personne).
Ce périphérique est homologué pour l'utilisation au Canada. Pour consulter l'entrée correspondant à l'appareil dans
la liste d'équipement radio (REL - Radio Equipment List) d'Industry Canada rendez-vous sur:
http://www.ic.gc.ca/app/sitt/reltel/srch/nwRdSrch.do?lang=eng
Pour des informations supplémentaires concernant l'exposition aux RF au Canada rendez-vous sur :
http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf08792.html
Canada IC statement
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le présent matériel est conforme
aux specifications techniques applicables d'Industrie Canada.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L'indice
d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à
une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d'indices d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède
pas cinq.
364 Appendix
Appendix 365
Index
Numerics
100Base-TX Full-Duplex, 126
100Base-TX Half-Duplex, 126
10Base-T Full-Duplex, 126
10Base-T Half-Duplex, 126
A
A4, 208
A5, 208
About printer, 25
AC (All Clear) button, 92
Address Book, 100, 102, 112, 133, 175
Address Book Editor, 293
ADF Cover, 26, 28, 324
ADF Glass, 320
Ad-Hoc, 127
Adjust Altitude, 111, 120, 151, 196
Adjust ColorRegi, 194
Adjust Fusing Unit, 111, 119, 149, 193
Adjust Transfer Roller, 111, 119, 149, 193
Adjusting Color Registration, 317
Admin Menu, 176
Administrator Password, 132
Alert Tone, 108, 113, 190
All Tones, 108, 113
Altitude, 302
Ans Machine/Fax, 270
Answer Machine/Fax, 117
Appendix, 359
Apply New Settings, 103
Asset Tag Number, 106
Authenticate Error Trap, 131
Auto Clear Alert Tone, 108, 113
Auto Exposure, 109-110, 115-116, 166, 170, 240
Auto Log Print, 108, 113, 191
Auto Rec Ans/FAX, 181, 270
Auto Rec Fax, 181, 270
Auto Rec TEL/FAX, 181, 270
Auto Receive Answer/Fax, 110, 117
Auto Receive Fax, 110, 117
Auto Receive Tel/Fax, 110, 117
Auto Regi Adjust, 194
Auto Registration Adjustment, 111, 119
Auto Reset, 108, 113, 189
Auto SSID Setup, 40
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), 25, 28
Automatic Redialing, 275
Avoiding Jam, 229, 323
B
B&W / Color LED, 92
B5, 208
Back button, 92
Backspace button, 92
Base memory, 301
Basic Information, 125
Basic Printer Problems, 339
Blue plug, 43
Bonjour (mDNS), 123, 126, 130
C
C5, 208
Cable, 303
Cancel button, 92
Canceling a job, 230
366 Appendix
Canceling a Job From the Computer Running
Windows, 230
Carbonless copy paper, 204
CCP, 204
Chart Print, 161
Clean Developer, 120, 161, 194
Clearing Paper Jam, 323
From ADF, 325
From Back of the Printer, 330
From Front of the Printer, 329
From Output Tray, 332
Clock Mode, 268
Clock Settings, 112, 121
Coated, 111, 119, 149, 193
Collated, 109, 115, 163, 236
Color, 109-110, 115-116, 163, 168, 236
Color Balance, 166
Color Button Set, 168
Color Mode button, 92
Color Registration Adjustment, 120
Color Registration Chart, 318
Color Test Page, 175
Community Name, 131
Completed Jobs, 99, 107
Connecting Printer, 35
Connection specification, 35, 303
Connection type, 35, 303
Conserving supplies, 309
Contact Dell Support at, 100, 102
Contact Person, 101
Contacting Service, 356
Contacts button, 91
Control Panel Tone, 108, 113
Copy button, 91
Copy Color Balance, 109, 115
Copy Defaults, 109, 115, 157
Copy Problem, 352
Copy Service Lock Set, 109, 114
Copy Settings, 109, 115
Country, 111, 118, 271
Cover, 106
Covers, 111, 119, 149, 193
CTD Sensor, 316
Custom Reduce/Enlarge, 115
D
Data LED, 91
Date & Time, 148, 190
Date Format, 112
Defaults Settings, 144
Delayed Start, 110, 116, 173
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, 97
Dell ScanCenter, 294
Dell Service Tag Number, 106
Dell Supplies Management System, 291
Dell Technical Support Policy, 359
Demo Page, 112
Details, 106
Determining Values, 318
DHCP, 123, 129
Dimensions, 301
Direct Connection, 36
Direct Connection Setup, 65
Direct Fax, 276
Discard Size, 111, 118, 186, 271
Display Popup, 112
Display Problems, 339
DL, 208
DL LEF, 208
DNS, 123, 129
Document Feeder Tray, 25, 28
Document Glass, 28, 320
Document Guides, 28
Document Output Tray, 25
Document Size, 109-110, 115-116, 165, 169, 238
Appendix 367
Driver, 21
DRPD, 117, 270
DRPD Pattern, 111, 118, 185, 270
E
ECM, 111, 118, 186, 271
Edit From Field, 198
E-Mail Alert, 100, 102, 126, 129, 179
E-Mail Alert Settings, 124, 130
E-Mail Alert Setup, 97
E-mail Alert Setup Page, 124
E-Mail Default Setup, 137
E-Mail Group, 136
E-Mail Server Settings, 129
Emulations, 301
Encryption, 122, 127
Entering Values, 319
Envelope, 111, 119, 149-150, 193-194, 206
Envelope #10, 208
Environment, 302
Environment Sensor Info, 161
Environment settings of your web browser, 97
Error History, 112, 175
Ethernet, 122, 126, 176, 303
Ethernet Connection, 36
Ethernet Port, 26, 35
EWS, 154, 180
EWS Settings, 125
Executive, 208
Express Code, 192
F
F/W Version, 192
Fault Time-Out, 189
Fax, 117
Fax Activity, 111, 118, 175, 187, 271
Fax Broadcast, 111, 118, 187, 271
Fax button, 91
Fax Cover Page, 111, 118, 184, 270
Fax Defaults, 110, 116, 156
Fax Forward Number, 111, 118
Fax Fwd Number, 186, 271
FAX Group, 135
Fax Group, 135
Fax Header, 110, 117, 184, 270
Fax Header Name, 110, 117, 184, 270
Fax Number, 111, 118, 184, 270
Fax Problems, 352
Fax Protocol, 111, 118
Fax Service Lock Set, 109, 114
Fax Settings, 110, 117, 145, 159, 181
FAX Speed Dial, 135
Fax Transmit, 111, 118, 271
File Format, 110, 116, 168
Finding Information, 21
Firmware Version, 107
Folio, 208
Forward Settings, 185, 271
Front Cover, 25, 324
Front USB Port, 25
FTP Client, 123
Function Enabled, 114, 197
Fusing Unit, 324
G
Gateway Address, 123, 128
Group Dial, 176
Group Dialing, 283
H
Host I/F, 107
Host Name, 107, 123, 128
368 Appendix
How to set up, 22
How to use, 21
HTTP, 123, 129
I
ID, 107
Identifying Print Media and Specifications, 208
Image Compression, 110, 116, 171
Important Information, 21
Impression Number, 107
Infrastructure, 127
Initial Settings, 47
Initialize NIC NVM and restart printer, 132
Initialize NVM, 180, 195
Installing a Toner Cartridge, 312
Installing Printer Drivers, 65, 85
Interfaces, 301
IP Address, 53, 99, 101, 123, 128
IP address, 123
IP Address Mode, 123, 128
IP Filter, 180
IP Filter (IPv4), 133
IP Mode, 123, 128
IP Settings, 55
IPv4, 123, 128-129, 131
IPv6, 123, 128-129, 131
J
Jam, 350
Job History, 112, 175
Job List, 99, 107
Job Name, 107
Job Status, 107
Job Submitted Time, 107
Job Time-Out, 108, 113, 189
Job Tone, 108, 113
Job Type, 107
Junk Fax Setup, 110, 117, 160, 183, 270
K
Kensington lock, 29
L
Label, 111, 119, 149-150, 193-194, 207
LCD, 91
LCD Panel, 92
Left frame, 102
Legal, 208
Length Guide, 25
Letter, 208
Levers, 26, 324
Lighter/Darker, 109-110, 115-116, 165, 169, 172,
239, 274
Line Monitor, 110, 117, 182, 270
Line Type, 110, 117, 182, 270
Link Channel, 122, 127
Link Quality, 122, 127
Liquid crystal display, 91
Loading Envelope, 216, 221
Loading Letterhead, 205, 218, 223
Loading Paper, 57
Loading Print Media, 211
Loading Print Media in Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF), 57, 211
Loading Print Media in Priority Sheet Inserter
(PSI), 62, 219
Location, 101, 106
Low Toner Alert Msg, 191
LPD, 123, 126, 129, 179
M
MAC Address, 122, 127
Appendix 369
Maintenance, 309
Manual Duplex Printing, 224
Manual SSID Setup, 41
Margin Left/Right, 109-110, 115-116, 167, 170,
241
Margin Middle, 109-110, 115-116, 167, 171, 242
Margin Top/Bottom, 109-110, 115-116, 167, 170,
241
Max E-Mail Size, 110, 116, 171
Memory, 301
Memory Capacity, 107
Menu button, 92
Menu Items, 104
Menu Settings, 108, 140
MIB Compatibility, 302
Mixed Mode PSK, 127
mm/inch, 108, 113, 191
Modem Speed, 111, 118, 187, 271
Monarch, 208
Monarch LEF, 208
MPF Extension, 25
Multiple Up, 309
Multiple-Up, 109, 115, 167, 240
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF), 25, 324
N
NCR, 204
Network, 176
Network Connection Setup, 68
Network Firmware Version, 107
Network Type, 122, 127
New Password, 114
No carbon required, 204
No. of Sheets, 107
Non-Dell Toner, 112, 121, 151, 196
Number of Copies, 235
Numeric keypad, 92, 94
O
OCR, 204
One Touch Dial button, 91
Online Help, 100, 102
Online Services, 359
Operating System Compatibility, 301
Operation, 302
Operator Panel, 25, 91
Button, 91
Optical character recognition, 204
Order Supplies, 30
Order Supplies at, 100, 102
Original Type, 109, 115, 165, 238, 273
OS, 301
Out of Paper Tone, 108, 113
Output Result, 107
Output Tray, 106
Output Tray Extension, 226
Owner, 107
P
Panel Alert Tone, 108, 113
Panel Language, 95, 108, 113, 199
Panel Lock, 197, 200
Panel Lock Set, 109
Panel Settings, 112, 174
Panel Settings Page, 95
Paper, 203
Characteristics, 203
Curl, 203
Fiber Content, 204
Grain Direction, 203
Moisture Content, 203
Smoothness, 203
Weight, 2 0 3
Paper Chute, 26
Paper Density, 111, 118, 148, 192
Paper Feed Roller, 26
370 Appendix
Paper jam location, 324
Paper Size, 208
Paper Trays, 106
Paper Type, 209
Paper Used, 133
Paper Width Guides, 25
Parts name, 25
PDL, 301
Peer-to-Peer, 82
Phone Book, 176
Phone Connector, 26, 35, 43, 303
Plain, 111, 119, 149, 193
Plain Thick, 111, 119, 149, 193
Point and Print, 80
Port Settings, 126
Port Status, 123, 126
Port9100, 123, 126, 129, 179
Power Connector, 26
Power On Wizard, 192
Power Saver Timer, 95
Power Saver Timer - Deep Sleep, 108, 113
Power Saver Timer - Sleep, 108, 113
Power Saving Timer, 95, 188
Power Supply, 301
Power Switch, 25
Prefix Dial, 111, 118, 186, 271
Prefix Dial Num, 186
Prefix Dial Number, 111, 118, 271
Premier, 112
Print Cartridge Level, 106
Print from USB, 109, 114
Print Head Cleaning Rod, 25
Print media, 309
Print Media Dimensions, 211
Print Media Guidelines, 203
Print Quality Guarantee, 302
Print Quality Problems, 341
Print Server Reports, 122
Print Server Settings, 100, 102, 122, 125
Print Server Setup Page, 122
Print Volume, 100, 102, 133
Printer Driver Pre-install Status, 65
Printer Events, 106
Printer Information, 100, 102, 106, 140
Printer Jobs, 99, 102, 107
Printer Maintenance, 118
Printer Page Count, 133
Printer Revision Levels, 107
Printer Serial Number, 107
Printer Settings, 99, 102, 108, 113
Printer Settings Report, 108
Printer Software, 291
Printer specification, 301
Printer Status, 99, 102, 106
Printer Type, 106
Printing, 229
Printing on Letterhead, 205
Printing Problems, 339
Printing Speed, 106
Printing Status Window, 291
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI), 25
Processor Speed, 107
Product Features, 23
Protocol, 179
Protocol Monitor, 175, 271
Q
Quick Launch Utility, 292
Quick Reference Guide, 21
R
Ready / Error LED, 91
Rear Cover, 26, 324
Appendix 371
Receive Mode, 110, 117, 181, 270
Recommended Paper, 204
Recycled, 111, 119, 149, 193-194
Recycling Information, 360
Re-dial / Pause button, 91
Redial Attempts, 110, 117, 183, 270
Redial Delay, 110, 117, 183, 270
Reduce/Enlarge, 109, 115, 164, 237
Re-enter Password, 114
Refresh, 103
Refresh Mode, 161
Registration Adjustment, 150
Regular, 112
Relative humidity, 302
Remote Rcv Tone, 183, 270
Remote Receive, 110, 117, 183, 270
Remote Receive Tone, 110, 117
Removing the Toner Cartridges, 310
Report Page, 231
Reports, 112, 142
Resend Delay, 110, 117, 183, 270
Reset Defaults, 121, 151
Reset Print Server, 132
Reset Wireless, 179
Resetting Defaults, 162, 201
Resolution, 110, 116, 169, 172, 273
Restore Settings, 103
Return Policy, 360
Right Frame, 103
Ring Tone Volume, 110, 117, 182, 270
Ringer Volume, 269
S
Safety information, 21
Scan button, 92
Scan Defaults, 110, 116, 154
Scan Service Lock Set, 109, 114
Scan To Network, 110, 116, 168
Scan to PC, 132
ScanButton Manager, 293
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems, 355
Scanner Unit, 324
Scanning Problems, 353
Secure Receive, 114, 198
Secure Receive Set, 109, 114
Secure Settings, 109, 114, 197
Security, 132
Security Settings, 127
Security Slot, 26
Select Reorder URL, 112
Selecting Paper, 204
Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead, 205
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper, 206
Sending a Fax, 272
Sending a Fax Automatically, 274
Sending a Fax Manually, 275
Sending print job, 229
Sent Fax Forward, 111, 118
Server Address, 137
Service Code, 22
Service Tag, 22, 192
Set Date, 112
Set Password, 100, 102, 132
Set Time, 112
Setting Copy Options, 235
Setting the IP Address, 53
Setting the Printer ID, 267
Setting the Time and Date, 268
Setting Up Printer, 47
Setting Your Country, 267
Setup diagram, 22
Sharpness, 109-110, 115-116, 166, 170, 239
SMB Client, 123
SNMP, 123, 126, 131
372 Appendix
SNMP UDP, 179
Software and Documentation disc, 21, 51
Software Download, 109, 114, 198
Speaker Volume, 268
Speed Dial, 176
Speed Dial button, 92
SSID, 122, 127
Start, 92
Start button, 92
Status Messager, 126
Status Monitor Console, 291
Status of printer supplies, 309
Storage, 302
Storage humidity range, 302
Storing consumables, 310
Storing Print Media, 207, 229, 309
Subnet Mask, 123, 128
Support
Contacting Dell, 360
System Settings, 108, 112-113, 125, 146, 174
System Settings page, 112
T
TCP/IP, 128
TCP/IP Settings, 123, 128, 143, 152
Telephone, 117, 270
Telephone/Fax, 117, 270
Temperature, 302
TIFF File Format, 116, 171
Time Format, 112
Time Zone, 112
Time-Out, 123, 129
Tone/Pulse, 110, 117, 182, 270
Toner Access Cover, 25
Toner Refresh, 120, 195
Top frame, 101
Transfer Belt, 26
Transfer Roller, 26
Transfer Roller Refresh, 195
Transfer Roller Refresh Mode, 152
Transmit Key, 122
Trap Notification, 131
Tray 1 Custom Size - X, 112
Tray 1 Custom Size - Y, 112
Tray 1 Paper Size, 112
Tray 1 Paper Type, 112
Tray Settings, 100, 102, 112, 138, 143, 153, 173
TWAIN, 247
U
Unacceptable Paper, 204
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT
RESTRICTED RIGHTS, 17
USB, 303
USB port, 26, 35
USB Settings
USB port, 199
USB storage device, 264
W
Wall Jack Connector, 26, 35, 43, 303
Warranty, 360
Warranty information, 21
Web Link Customization, 112, 122, 152
WEP 128 Bit ASCII (13 Bytes), 127
WEP 128 Bit Hex (26 Bytes), 127
WEP 64 Bit ASCII (5 Bytes), 127
WEP 64 Bit Hex (10 Bytes), 127
White Document Cover, 320
White Strip, 320
Wi-Fi, 180
Wi-Fi | WPS button, 38, 92
Backlight, 93
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), 248
Appendix 373
Wireless Connection, 37
Wireless LAN, 122, 127
Wireless Problems, 356
Wireless Settings, 122, 127
Wireless Setup, 177
Wireless Status, 177
WPA2-PSK AES, 127
WPA-PSK TKIP, 127
WPS, 178
WPS-PBC, 38-39
WPS-PIN, 40
WSD, 76, 123, 126, 129
Y
Yellow terminator, 44
374 Appendix

Navigation menu